BERO 2 Proximity Switchesmaterias.fi.uba.ar/7206/FS10_ch02_BERO_e_2004_10.pdf · Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/5 BERO Proximity Switches IQ Sense IQ-Sense photoelectric sensors 2 Overview

2

Siemens FS 10 · 2004

BEROProximity Switches

2/4 IQ Sense2/4 Introduction2/5 IQ Sense photoelectric

sensors 2/7 IQ Sense ultrasonic

sensors2/8 Sensor module

4 IQ IQ Sense sensor module for ET 200S8×IQ Sense sensor module for S7-300/ET 200M

2/9 Sonar BEROs2/9 Summary of ranges2/10 Introduction2/26 Compact ranges I to III2/28 Compact range III2/30 Compact range II2/31 Compact range I2/32 Configuration assis-

tance for compact ranges I to III

2/34 M 18 compact range 2/36 M 18 S compact range 2/38 Compact range for

pump control2/39 K 08 compact form 2/40 Compact range 02/42 3SG16 compact form 2/44 K 65 compact form2/47 Sonar through-beam

sensor2/49 Double layer sheet

monitoring

2/51 Accessories for Sonar BERO

2/51 SONPROG interface device

2/53 Mounting sets

2/54 Opto BEROs2/54 Summary of ranges2/58 Introduction2/67 D 4 form 2/68 M 5 form 2/69 M 12 form 2/71 M 18 S form 2/73 M 18 form 2/74 M 18 P form 2/77 K 20 form 2/78 K 21, K 21 R forms 2/80 K 31 form 2/82 K 30 form 2/84 K 40 form 2/86 C 40 form 2/88 K 80 form 2/91 KL 40 form 2/92 CL 40 form color

sensors2/93 C 80 form – color mark

sensors2/94 L 18 form – Laser2/96 L 50 form – Laser2/98 Light arrays

2/99 Accessories for Opto BERO

2/99 Plastic optical fibers2/101 Mounting brackets2/103 Reflectors

2/104 Inductive BEROs2/104 Summary of ranges2/108 Introduction2/122 Operating dist. 0.6 mm2/123 Operating dist. 0.8 mm2/124 Operating dist. 1 mm2/126 Operating dist. 1.5 mm2/130 Operating dist. 2 mm2/136 Operating dist. 2.5 mm2/140 Operating dist. 3 mm2/143 Operating dist. 3 mm,

pressure resistant to 500 bar

2/144 Operating dist. 4 mm2/151 Operating dist. 5 mm2/156 Operating dist. 6 mm2/157 Operating dist.

0 to 6 mm, with analog output

2/158 Operating dist. 8 mm2/164 Operating dist. 10 mm2/169 Operating dist. 10 mm

Operating dist. 12 mm2/171 Operating dist. 15 mm2/180 Operating dist. 20 mm2/186 Operating dist. 22 mm2/187 Operating dist. 25 mm2/189 Operating dist. 30 mm2/191 Operating dist. 35 mm2/192 Operating dist. 40 mm2/198 Operating dist. 50 mm

Operating dist. 65 mm2/199 Operating dist. 75 mm

2/200 Capacitive BEROs2/200 Introduction2/202 10 to 65 V DC2/204 20 to 250 V AC

2/205 Accessories for BERO2/205 Power supply units2/207 Connectors2/212 Distributors2/213 Mounting accessories

2/2

Even under adverse conditions:

reliable detection using Sonar BEROs

The range of applications for the Sonar BERO

ultrasonic sensors is practically unlimited.

Whether level, height or distance measurements

are involved, or the counting of bottles, etc. – at

a distance of 6 cm to 10 m, Sonar BEROs detect

objects of any kind, even liquids, powders, col-

ored or transparent objects. The nature of the

surfaces is irrelevant, they can be rough or

smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry.

Accurate in detection, absolutely safe in use:

Sonar BEROs are extremely rugged and insen-

sitive to dirt, vibration, ambient light or ambient

noise.

Accurate detection at first glance:

No problem for Opto BEROs

Available in many different designs and versions

to satisfy all possible requirements:

• Diffuse sensors

• Diffuse sensors with background suppression

• Retroreflective sensors

• Thru-beam sensors.

Opto BEROs are preferably used in the following

sectors:

• Conveying and handling systems

• Mechanical engineering

• Paper, textile and plastics processing

• Printing technology

• Packaging technology.

Operating with either infrared, red or

laser light, the comprehensive range of

Opto BEROs cover distances up to 50 m.

They can be set quickly and easily by means of

teach-in or a potentiometer.

SE

NS

OR

SThe comprehensive range of BERO sensors always provides the correct solution for whatever your

application. Irrespective of what is happening in automated processes: the BERO sensors hear,

see and sense everything – they are the sense organs for automation.

BERO sensors –the sense organs for automation

2/3

Metal or non-metal? The answer is

provided by inductive or capacitive

BEROs

Inductive BEROs are the low-cost method

for non-contact detection of metal objects.

They are preferably used in the automotive

industry, in mechanical engineering, in the

robot industry, but also for conveying and

handling systems or in the paper and print-

ing industry.

Inductive BEROs are extremely reliable with

a very high repeat accuracy and long ser-

vice life thanks to no-wear operation as well

as their insensitivity to temperature, noise,

light and water.

Many different versions cover all possible

applications and demands.

Capacitive BEROs are also non-contact

sensors for measuring conducting and non-

conducting materials as solids, powders or

liquids. Typical applications include level

signaling or monitoring.

IQ Sense

IQ Sense offers a completely new concept

for intelligent integration of sensors into au-

tomation engineering. Just like all products

and systems incorporated in our Totally Inte-

grated Automation platform, IQ Sense de-

vices also feature the same properties with

respect to communications capability, data

management and configuration/program-

ming. This provides advantages in every as-

pect, and not just enormous savings

potential for engineering. For the first time,

plant-wide communication can be imple-

mented down to the sensor level extremely

profitably and in a particularly easy manner.

Summary of IQ Sense highlights

• Intelligent communication between sen-

sor and PLC

• Parameter and diagnostics data of sen-

sors are available throughout the plant

• Error-free from planning through to wiring

up thanks to simple interfaces

• Optimum interaction between sensors

and PLC even for future types of sensors

Reliable at every performance level –

IQ Sense modules and sensors

• Sensor module 4 IQ Sense for ET 200S

• Sensor module 8 x IQ Sense for

SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M

• Optical sensors for IQ Sense

• Ultrasonic sensors for IQ Sense

Plant-wide communication down to the sensor level – easy and fast to implement with IQ Sense

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/4

BERO Proximity Switches

Introduction

IQ Sense

2

Overview

Sensors and PLCs are growing together

Thanks to intelligent linking to the PLC, IQ Sense can now be used to implement significantly more flexibility and reliability of the sensors. The uniform exchange of data presents a great number of advantages – for plant construction as well as for its operation.

For example, the new IntelliTeach® function permits machine and plant constructors to achieve fast commissioning, since all settings for the IQ Sense devices can be made using the PLC. Values set once on a sensor can be transmitted to other sensors without problem.

Sensors can be exchanged during operation without any extra work since the PLC automatically reestablishes all sensor set-tings.

Furthermore, IQ Sense permits channel-specific system diag-nostics. Wire break, short-circuit, maladjustment or module/sen-sor failure are automatically signaled, and parameterization er-rors are avoided. It is therefore possible to reduce downtimes and to increase plant availability.

Summary of features7 Low wiring overhead thanks to polarity-independent two-wire

design7 Fast commissioning and dynamic modification of parameters

by IntelliTeach7 High plant availability thanks to signals and displays for pre-

ventive maintenance (e.g. warning of surplus light emission in case of contamination or maladjustment of optical sensors)

7 Avoidance of mutual influencing of sensors due to anti-inter-ference function

7 Channel-specific system diagnostics7 Fast replacement of sensors due to automatic re-parameter-

ization without renewed teach-in.

Wiring system

IQ Sense uses a two-wire system between sensor and channel of the IQ Sense module. Standard unshielded cables with a maximum permissible length of 50 m can be used for this point-to-point connection. The cable is used for both the power supply and data communication.

Configuration/parameterization

Uniform configuration tools such as STEP 7 or COM PB permit uniform and central data management of the configuration and parameterization data for all sensors.

The static settings of the various types of sensor, such as "opti-cal" and "ultrasonic", are defined by sensor profiles which are al-ready present in STEP 7 or in the GSD file of the IQ Sense mod-ules and which can be set there.

Settings which can be modified during operation can be taught directly on the sensor or defined by the PLC using IntelliTeach.

Processing of the process values

All process values, settings and sensor-specific data are present in the PLC program and are available throughout the system. A supplied function block for SIMATIC S7 supports the provision and evaluation of these data for the S7 programming engineer.

Diagnostics

No additional hardware is required for transmission of the diag-nostics information. This is carried out event-driven through the two-wire line. The messages associated with channel-specific sensor diagnostics are embedded both in the S7 system diag-nostics and in the PROFIBUS DP standard diagnostics. Access to these messages is therefore identical to that with all other au-tomation components.

IntelliTeach

IntelliTeach is the specification of the variable sensor settings by the PLC or by an Human-Machine-Interface device (OP operator panel, field PG), and presents the following advantages for you:7 Commissioning: A sensor is trained using the current objects.

Using IntelliTeach, the determined settings can be copied to any number of further sensors.

7 During operation: Various batch-dependent settings can be saved in the PLC, called as required, and downloaded to the sensors.

Parameter management

The configuration data of the sensors together with the static set-tings are set in the configuring tool and saved in the CPU. The settings can be modified during operation and are saved on the IQ Sense module. No settings are saved in the sensor itself. If a sensor is replaced, all settings are automatically reestablished by the IQ Sense module.

EMC

IQ Sense complies with the following EMC guidelines:7 Electrostatic discharge resistance to IEC 61000-4-2: 8 kV air

discharge, 4 kV indirect discharge7 High-frequency resistance according to IEC 61000-4-3:

10 V/m7 Fast transient resistance according to IEC 61000-4-4: 2 kV7 RF conducted interference according to IEC 61000-4-6: 10 kV7 Emitted interference requirements according to EN 55011:

Group 1, Level B (permissible also in residential and office buildings).

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/5

BERO Proximity SwitchesIQ Sense

IQ-Sense photoelectric sensors

2

Overview

Opto BERO with IQ Sense, C 40 form Opto BERO with IQ Sense, K 80 form

The photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the re-ceived quantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected.

These sensors detect all objects regardless of their composition, whether metal, wood or plastic.

Depending on the type of BERO, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated. The following operating modes are possible with IQ Sense:7 Diffuse sensors (energetic)7 Diffuse sensors with background suppression7 Retroreflective sensors

Features:7 C 40 IQ Sense and K 80 IQ Sense forms7 IntelliTeach functionality7 Integral anti-interference function7 Advanced failure signal (contamination/maladjustment).

Functions

Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)

The light from the emitter falls on an object and is re-flected in a diffuse pattern. Part of this reflected light reaches the receiver located in the same device. If the intensity of the received light is sufficient, the out-

put is switched.

The sensing range depends on the size and color of the object involved as well as its surface texture. The sensing range can be varied within a wide range by means of the built-in potentiome-ter. The energetic sensor can therefore also be used to detect different colors.

Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Diffuse sensors with background suppression can detect objects up to a specific sensing range. All ob-jects beyond this range are suppressed. The focus level can be adjusted. The background is sup-

pressed due to the geometric constellation between the emitter and the receiver.

Retroreflective sensors

The light from the emitter diode is focused through a lens and directed by a polarization filter to a reflector (principle of a 3-way mirror). Part of the reflected light passes through another polarization filter and

reaches the receiver. The filters are selected and aligned in such a way that only the light reflected from the reflector reaches the receiver and not the light reflected from other objects within the beam range.

An object that interrupts the light beam from the emitter through the reflector to the receiver causes the output to switch.

See page 2/54 for more details on the photoelectric proximity switches.

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/6


IQ-Sense photoelectric sensors

IQ Sense

2

Technical specifications

Selection and ordering data

Form C40 IQ Sense K80 IQ Sense

Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)Sensing range m 0,7 2

Standard target mm 200 × 200 (white)

Emitter (type of light) nm 660 (red LED ) 880 (IR LED)

Current input mA 50

Response time ms 1

LEDs Switching display (yellow), surplus light (green)

Enclosure material ABS + PBTP PBTP

Degree of protection IP67

Dimensions mm 40 × 40 × 53 83 × 65 × 25

Diffuse sensor with background suppressionSensing range m – 0.2 ... 1

Standard target mm – 200 × 200 (white)

Emitter (type of light) nm – 880 (IR LED)

Current input mA – 50

Response time ms – 2

LEDs – Switching display (yellow), surplus light (green)

Enclosure material – PBTP

Degree of protection – IP67

Dimensions mm – 83 × 65 × 25

Retroreflective sensorSensing range m 6 8

Reflector Type D84, 3RX7916

Emitter (type of light) nm 660 (red LED, polarized)

Current input mA 50

Response time ms 1

LEDs Switching display (yellow), surplus light (green)

Enclosure material ABS + PBTP PBTP


Dimensions mm 40 × 40 × 53 83 × 65 × 25

Version Form Operating mode Order No.

Photoelectric sensors for connection to the 4 IQ Sense sen-sor module

C40 IQ Sense Diffuse sensor 3SF7 240-3JQ00

Retroreflective sensor with 3SF7 241-3JQ00

K80 IQ Sense Diffuse sensor 3SF7 210-3JQ00


3SF7 214-3JQ00

Retroreflective sensor with 3SF7 211-3JQ00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/7

BERO Proximity SwitchesIQ Sense

IQ-Sense ultrasonic sensors

2

Overview

The Sonar BEROs of the M18 IQ compact range are all-in-one units ready for connection, and have a cylindrical M 18 enclo-sure for connection to the S7-300/ET 200M IQ Sense module SM338, 8×IQ Sense7 5 operating modes

– Operation as a measuring sensor ("Analog signal"), – Diffuse sensor with background suppression, – Diffuse sensor with large differential travel, – Diffuse sensor with foreground and background– suppression,– Retroreflective sensor.

7 Static setting of parameters using STEP 77 Dynamic setting of parameters using an S7 function block7 Measured distance from object is always transmitted7 Synchronization capability, multiplex operation7 Temperature compensation7 Connection through M12 connector7 Non-polarized two-wire system (protected against polarity re-

versal)7 Channel-specific system diagnostics (e.g. wire break, short-

circuit, parameterization faults).

Design

The devices of the M18 IQ compact range are always supplied with permanently installed sensors.

Functions

The devices are suitable for various operating modes. The oper-ating mode is statically parameterizable using the S7 Manager. The following are possible:7 Switching signal deactivated; only transmission of the analog

value (distance)7 Switching signal: sensor with background suppression + ana-

log value7 Switching signal: sensor with large differential travel + analog

value7 Switching signal: sensor with foreground and background

suppression + analog value

7 Switching signal: retroreflective sensor + analog value

The sensor cyclically transmits the distance (analog value) to the module.

Furthermore, the following static parameters can be set:7 Differential travel (1 % / 5 % / 8 % / 10 %)7 Temperature compensation7 Mean value7 Attenuation7 Time function and time value7 Sync mode (multiplex/synchronization)7 Setting of switching points (teach-in/parameterization)7 Sensor ID.

The following dynamic parameters are available:7 Start and end of switching range (using teach-in/parameter-

ization).

Various data/information can be read out from the sensor during operation:7 Sensor identification (manufacturer, Order No., version, sen-

sor ID, set parameters, etc.)7 Diagnostics.

Following enabling of the local teach-in, the beginning and end of the switching range can be set using the built-in potentiome-ter. The found value is then available as a dynamic parameter.



Type 3SF62 32–3JA00 3SF62 33–3JA00

Sensing range

• Rated value cm 5 ... 30 15 ... 100

• Maximum value cm 5 ... 50 15 ... 150

Standard target mm 10 × 10 20 × 20

Differential travel H (adjustable) mm 3 ... 30 10 ... 100

Repeat accuracy R mm 1 2

Operational voltage (DC) From IQ Sense

Rated operating current Ie From IQ Sense

No-load supply current I0 From IQ Sense

Adjustment/parameterization Start and end of the switching range using IQ Sense (IntelliTeach) or local teach-in using potentiometer

Ultrasonic frequency kHz 400 200

Switching frequency f Hz 8 4

Response time ms 54 110

Measuring time ms 13.44 26.88

Status display Yellow LED

Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated, CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface


Ambient temperature

• Operation °C –25 ... +70

• Storage °C –40 ... +85

Version Form Sensing range Order No.

cm

Ultrasonic sensors for connection to IQ Sense

M 18 IQ Sense 5 ... 30 3SF6 232–3JA00

15 ... 100 3SF6 233–3JA00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/8


4 IQ Sense sensor module for ET 200S8×IQ Sense sensor module for ET 200M/S7-300

IQ Sense

2

Overview

4 IQ Sense module for ET 200S

7 The 4 IQ Sense module is an intelligent 4-channel electronics module for the ET 200S distributed I/O station in the PROFIBUS DP networking system. It is used to connect pho-toelectric sensors with IQ Sense technology.

7 The 8×IQ Sense sensor module is an intelligent 8-channel I/O module for SIMATIC S7-300 and ET 200M, and is used to con-nect photoelectric and ultrasonic sensors with IQ Sense tech-nology. Mixing of different sensor types on one module is pos-sible.

Standard function blocks are available for simplified handling on a SIMATIC S7. Conventional sensors cannot be used on these modules.

Main applications of the IQ Sense system are plants and ma-chines7 with high availability demands,7 with a high probability of mutual influencing of the sensors,7 with high flexibility and dynamic modification requirements for

the sensor parameters.

Functions

7 Connection of up to 4 or 8 IQ Sense sensors7 Low wiring overhead (2 wires, polarity-independent)7 Rapid commissioning thanks to IntelliTeach:

- Presetting of sensor parameters, or copying of parameters set by teach-in onto other modules/sensors

- Dynamic modification of parameters (e.g. range setting) us-ing PLC program

- Integral alignment support using LED display7 High plant availability due to:

- signals and displays for preventive maintenance (e.g. warning of surplus light emission in case of contamina-tion or maladjustment of optical sensors)

- No mutual influencing of sensors (anti-interference function)7 Channel-specific system diagnostics (e.g. open-circuit, short-

circuit, module/sensor failure, etc.)7 Fast replacement of sensors due to automatic re-parameter-

ization without renewed teach-in (alignment)

Additionally with ET 200S:7 Hot swapping of modules possible

7 Can be plugged onto TM-E terminal module with automatic coding.

Additionally with ET 200M:7 Reading of vendor-specific and sensor-specific data (e.g.

manufacturer, Order No., release version, etc.) directly out of the sensor.



System ET 200S S7-300 / ET 200M

Type 4 IQ Sense 8×IQ Sense

Number of inputs 4 8

Cable length

• Unshielded,max. 50 m

• Shielded, max. 50 m

Voltages, currents, potentials

Rated supply voltage (from power module)

24 V DC

• Reverse polarity protection yes

Electrical isolation

• Between the channels no

• Between the channels and backplane bus

yes

Permissible potential difference

• Between different circuits 75 V DC, 60 V AC

Insulation tested at 500 V DC

Current input

• From power supply, max. 0.3 A 1 A

• From backplane bus – 150 mA

Module power loss, typ. 0.85 W –

Status, alarms, diagnostics

Status display Green LED per channel

Diagnostics functions

• Group fault Red LED "SF"

• Reading of diagnostics information yes

Data for selection of a sensor

Connectable sensors Photoelectric sen-sors with IQ Sense

Photoelectric and ultrasonic sen-sors with IQ Sense

Response times

Cycle time, max. 3.24 ms 6 ms

Construction

• Dimensions W × H × D (mm) 15 × 81 × 52 40 × 125 × 120

• Weight, approx. 0.035 kg 0.250 kg

Order No.4 IQ Sense sensor modules

6ES7 138-4GA00-0AB0

8 IQ Sense sensor module

6ES7 338-7XF00-0AB0

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/9

BERO Proximity SwitchesSonar BEROs

Summary of ranges

2

Overview

The following table lists the most important technical features of the individual ranges.

Com

pac

t ran

ge

I

Com

pac

t ran

ge

II

Com

pac

t ran

ge

III

M18

com

pac

t ran

ge

M18

S c

omp

act r

ang

e

K08

com

pac

t for

m

Com

pac

t ran

ge

0

3SG

16 c

omp

act f

orm

K65

com

pac

t for

m

Son

ar th

ru-b

eam

sen

sor

Dou

ble

-laye

r sh

eet m

onito

ring

Operating modeDiffuse sensor 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

Reflex sensor 7 7 7 $ 7 7 7

Thru-beam sensors. 7 7 7 7 7 7

Output1 switching output 7 7 7 7 7 7

2 switching outputs 7 7 7 7 7

1 switching output + 1 analog output 7

1 analog output 7 7 7

1 frequency output 7 7 7 7

Analog output0 to 20 mA 7 7 7

4 to 20 mA 7 7 7

0 to 10 V 7 7 7 7

Adjustment1 potentiometers 7 7

2 potentiometers 7 7 7

SONPROG interface device 7 7 7 7

Plug-in jumpers 7

Teach-in 7 7 7 7 7 7

KeysWiring 7

Parameters adjustable using SONPROGBlind zone 7 7 7 7

End of sensing range 7 7 7 7

Lower limit of operating range 7 7 $ 7

Upper limit of operating range 7 7 $ 7

Differential travel 7 7 $ 7

NO/NC function 7 7 $ 7

Lower limit of analog range 7 &

Upper limit of analog range 7 &

Characteristic of analog output 7 &

Current range of analog output 7 &

Mean value generation 7 7 7 7

Function mode 7 7 7

Temperature compensation 7 7 7 7

Enabling/disabling of potentiometers 7 7 $

For description, see page 2/31 2/30 2/28 2/34 2/36 2/39 2/40 2/42 2/44 2/47 2/49

Sonar BERO programmable using SONPROG interface device

7 Available$ Only available for units with switching output& Only available for units with analog output

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/10


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

Sonar BEROs can be used as non-contact proximity switches in many fields of automation. Whenever distances through air have to be evaluated, these devices can be used, because they not only detect objects, but can also output and evaluate the abso-lute distance between the Sonar BERO and the object. Chang-ing environmental conditions (e. g. temperature variations) are compensated during evaluation of the measurement.

Sonar BEROs measure the runtime of the ultrasonic pulse emit-ted by the BERO and reflected by the object from which they can calculate the distance to the object. Sonar BEROs can operate over extremely short (6 cm) or extremely long distances (10 m) with ease.

With the SONPROG software, it is easy to calibrate the BERO to the object and operating range (e.g. minimum fill level).

Area of application

The wide range of areas of application for the Sonar BERO ultra-sonic sensors gives full rein to the imagination:• Fill level and height sensing• Spacing measurement• Winding diameter sensing• Bottle counting, and much more.

The Sonar BEROs are extremely rugged and insensitive to dirt, vibration and ambient noise.

Objects

Using ultrasonic technology, Sonar BEROs can detect objects of any kind, this includes liquids, powders or granulates, and col-ored or transparent objects. Whether the surface of the object is rough or smooth, clean or dirty, wet or dry is of no consequence.

Even at a maximum operating distance, all level or smooth sur-faces can be reliably detected up to an angular variation of ap-proximately 3° from the sound cone. Depending on the peak-to-valley height of the object, the angular variation may also be higher.

As a rule, the objects can enter the sound cone from any direc-tion.

Explosion protection

The Sonar BEROs of compact ranges 0 to III and M18 as well as the sonar thru-beam sensors and compact form sensors 3SG16 and K 65 are suitable for installation in Ex-Zone 2 and Ex-Zone 11.

Personal safety

Due to their physical characteristics, the Sonar BERO ultrasonic proximity switches cannot be used for safety-related applications ( e.g. for the protec-tion of personnel).

Application examples

Level measurement in large tanks: Compact K 65 form with minimum/maximum monitoring (up to 2.5 m), M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m)

Level measurement in small bottles: M18 compact range with analog output

Size measurement: M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m)

NSD00801

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/11


Introduction

2

Measurement of stack height: M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m)

Measurement of diameter and speed: M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m)

Contour measurement (synchronization): M18 compact range with analog output (up to 1 m), compact range III (up to 6 m)

Loop monitoring: K 65 compact form with minimum/maximum monitoring (up to 2.5 m), compact range II with 2 switching outputs

Bottle counting and detection of intervals: Sonar thru-beam sensor

Object measurement: M18 compact range with switching output

Quality inspection: M18 compact range with switching output, compact range II (up to 6 m)

Breakage monitoring: M18 compact range with switching output (up to 30 cm)

Wire and rope breakage monitoring: M18 compact range with switching output, compact range II

Distance monitoring: compact range II with 2 switching outputs (up to 6 m)

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/12


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2

Special applications

Com

pac

t ran

ge

0, I,

II, I

II, M

18

(sp

ecia

l ver

sion

)

Com

pac

t ran

ge

0, I,

II, I

II, M

18

(sp

ecia

l ver

sion

)

Com

pac

t ran

ge

II w

ith 2

sw

itchi

ng

outp

uts

(sp

ecia

l ver

sion

)

Com

pac

t ran

ge

II, M

18 (

spec

ial

vers

ion)

K65

com

pac

t for

m

Com

pac

t ran

ge

II w

ith 2

sw

itchi

ng

outp

uts

(sp

ecia

l ver

sion

)

Com

pac

t ran

ge

II w

ith fr

eque

ncy

outp

ut

Com

pac

t ran

ge

II (s

pec

ial v

ersi

on)

Son

ar th

ru-b

eam

sen

sor

Com

pac

t ran

ge

II (s

pec

ial v

ersi

on)

In chemically corrosive mediumUltrasonic transducer with Teflon foil

7

For food processingUltrasonic sensor with teflon film, PPS ring, enclosure made of stainless steel V4A

7

Stroke control for machines with minimum/maximum detection2 separately adjustable switching points

7

Level monitoring for pump control with 1 switching outputSwitching point for "Full" signal and pump stroke separately adjustable

7

Level monitoring for pump control with 2 switching outputsFor "Full" signal with Differential Travel 1, for switch-off at limit with Differential Travel 2, level-dependent signaling

7

Roll diameter monitoringWarning signal with switching output 1, switch-off at limit with switching output 2

7

Threshold measurement using LOGO!The frequency output is measured by the counter inputs of the LOGO! control units: several threshold values assigned to the relay outputs of the LOGO! control unit

7

Gate control, entrance controlParameterizable pickup/dropout delay, Sonar BERO used for operating gates

7

Transport belt controlUsed in cabinet with emitter and receiver: no blind zone, max. switching frequency 200 Hz, insensitive to dust and condensation

7

Loop control for control of sagAveraging and differential travel with echo pulse detection

7

For description, see page 2/38 2/44 2/31 2/47

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/13


Introduction

2

Design

Mounting

Sonar BEROs can be operated in any mounting position. Mount-ing positions in which deposits can settle on the transducer sur-face must however be avoided.

The best results are obtained if the Sonar BEROs are aligned such that the ultrasound waves hit the object as near to the ver-tical as possible. If this is not possible (e.g. in the case of bulk material), the maximum possible range must be determined ex-perimentally. This depends on the material, surface and align-ment of the objects.

To prevent undesirable reflections, the distance a must be main-tained from disturbing objects around the axis of the sound cone.

Between the sound cone axis and a smooth wall running in par-allel to it, the distance b must be maintained to prevent disturb-ing reflections. The distance c must be maintained to ensure that no objects enter the blind zone (see the sound cones).

Mounting multiple sensors

Mutual interference between Sonar BEROs that can result in spurious signals is excluded by maintaining sufficient distances between the sensors or an appropriate alignment.

If two Sonar BEROs of an identical design are mounted opposite each other, the distance d must be maintained between them. If two sensors of identical design are arranged in parallel, the dis-tance e must be maintained between the sensors.

To avoid mutual interference, BERO sensors of compact ranges 0, II, III and M18 can be synchronized or operated in multiplex mode (see „Functions“).

Fouling

The range of the BERO is reduced if the transducer surface is damaged or painted or if water or wet dirt is applied to it.

Clearance a around the axis of the sound cone: keep space free of objects

Sonar BERO with sensing range

a

cm cm

6 (5) to 3020 to 130 (100)40 to 30060 to 60080 to 1000

> 6> 30> 60> 90> 150

Distance b between two Sonar BEROs and a smooth surface


b

cm cm

6 (5) to 3020 to 130 (100)40 to 30060 to 60080 to 1000

> 3> 15> 30> 40> 70

Distance d between two Sonar BEROSonar BEROs mounted opposite each other with the same sensing range


d

cm cm

6 (5) to 3020 to 130 (100)40 to 30060 to 60080 to 1000

> 120> 400> 1200> 2500> 4000

Distance e between two Sonar BEROs arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object perpendicular to the axis of the sound cone


e

cm cm

6 (5) to 3020 to 130 (100)40 to 30060 to 60080 to 1000

> 15> 60> 150> 250> 350

Distance e between two Sonar BEROs arranged in parallel with the same sensing range, object with unfavorable orientation

The distance e must be exper-imentally determined depend-ing on the angle between the object and the Sonar BERO.

NSD00749

b Sound cone

Sonar-BERO

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/14


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2

Functions

The Sonar BEROs only operate through the medium of air and can detect any object that reflects ultrasound.

The sensors emit ultrasonic pulses cyclically. When an object re-flects these pulses, the generated echo is received and con-verted into an electrical signal. The incoming echo is detected in accordance with its intensity which, in turn, is dependent on the distance between the object and the Sonar BERO.

The Sonar BEROs operate according to the echo propagation principle i.e. the time difference between the emitted pulse and the echo pulse is evaluated.

The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only de-tected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes can-not be evaluated for physical reasons.

Resolution

The resolution is the smallest change in the distance to the ob-ject that is necessary for a change in the output of the BERO. The internal resolution is 256 or 4096 steps. If values are entered during programming that exceed this resolution, the program will automatically correct them. The corrected values will be dis-played in a window with a message.

Example

Sonar BERO 3RG6014–..... (60 to 600 cm)

For a sensing range 60 to 600 cm, this results in a resolution of 1.3 mm:

6000 mm – 600 mm = 5400 mm 5400 mm/4096 = 1.3 mm (12 bit)

If the measuring range is restricted, the step size is reduced be-cause the distance that is split up into 4096 steps has reduced. The smallest step size is, however, limited to 1 mm by the elec-tronics. If the sensing range is restricted, the resolution is en-hanced.

Temperature compensation

The Sonar BEROs of compact range II, III and M18 as well as modular range II are fitted with temperature sensors and a com-pensation circuit that equalizes changes in operating distances caused by temperature changes.

Compensation can be performed throughout the temperature range. This means that an absolute precision of +/- 1.5 % (com-pact ranges II and III) or of +/- 2.5 % (compact range M18) is achieved.

Operating modes with switching output

The Sonar BEROs with switching output (the graphics describe sensors with NO function) can be used in the following modes depending on their type.

Only emitter, only receiver

Two Sonar BEROs are required in each case for this operating mode. One is parameterized as a receiver and the other is pa-rameterized as the emitter. There are two possible applications:7 Thru-beam sensor:

It is only evaluated whether an object lies between the BEROs. The range is twice the normal range. Adjustment of the oper-ating range and evaluation of the analog output is not relevant in this case.

7 Active measurement system: The propagation time of the ultrasonic signal from the emitter to the receiver is measured. The enabling inputs of the two BEROs must be connected together for this purpose. All op-tions of the BEROs can still be used; the range is twice the nor-mal range.

Emitter and receiver

This is the normal operating mode of the Sonar BERO; it oper-ates as a typical proximity switch.7 Diffuse sensor:

In this case, the object that is to be detected acts as a reflec-tor. As soon as an object enters the preset operating range, the echo from this object causes the output signal of the BERO to change.

7 Reflex sensor: In this case, a permanently fixed reflector (e.g. a small metal plate is mounted opposite the BERO. The operating range is adjusted to this reflector. If the path between the BERO and the reflector is interrupted, the sensor no longer detects the re-flector and this triggers a change in the signal at the switching output.

Synchronization

In compact ranges 0, II, III and M18, several devices can be syn-chronized with each other by simply interconnecting the syn-chronization outputs of the devices (Pin 2 for NO function, Pin 4 for NC function). Up to 10 devices can be synchronized (or 6 de-vices in the case of compact range 0). This allows the sensors to be mounted extremely close to each other in many cases without causing mutual interference.

Advantages:7 No additional wiring overheads, simply connect the enable in-

puts of the individual BEROs.7 Fast response, because every BERO is constantly active.

Disadvantages7 The object cannot be assigned to a particular BERO.

Example

Two Sonar BEROs are mounted at a clearance e that is smaller than the minimum clearance (see „Mounting guidelines“). An ob-ject is located in their common sound field. The echo from B2 can reach B1 by reflection (GB). Mutual interference can occur. The object is detected from the two echoes E1 and E2 by Sonar BEROs B1 and B2. If the two devices are synchronized, there

!

"#

"# $

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/15


Introduction

2

may be no mutual interference, because for example, echo E1 arrives after echo E2 at BERO B2. The devices only ever re-spond to the first echo.

Multiplex function

External multiplex mode

The fourth connection can be used as an external enabling in-put. This can be used to switch the Sonar BERO to active or in-active using an external control without the need to switch the supply voltage on and off. An external multiplex mode can be configured when Sonar BEROs have to be switched on and off in sequence through the enabling input. In this case, it is en-sured that the Sonar BEROs will not interfere with each other. In contrast to internal multiplex mode, more than 10 Sonar BEROs can be operated in multiplex mode.

Connection of the enable input:• Sonar BERO active,

Enable input XI at L+ or open.• Sonar BERO inactive,

Enable input XI at 0 to 3 V DC

Advantages:7 Reliable protection against mutual interference.7 An object can be assigned to a BERO.

Disadvantages7 Additional connection overheads (e.g. a PLC).7 Longer response time than for a synchronization circuit be-

cause each BERO is only active briefly and then has to wait until all the other BEROs in the circuit have emitted.

Example: Recognition of narrow objects

Narrow objects are to be recognized and it shall be determined whether one, two or no objects are present.

In this example, echo GB would cause BERO B1 to mistakenly detect an object. Synchronization of the BEROs would not help here because echo pulse E2 would not arrive until after echo GB at BERO B1 and a BERO only ever detects the first echo. In this example, a PLC must be used to switch cyclically to and fro be-tween the two BEROs.

Internal multiplex mode

The Sonar BEROs of compact ranges 0, II, III and M18 can be interconnected to form a network. Up to 10 devices (or 6 devices in the case of compact range 0) can be operated in series or parallel (see "Synchronization"). No additional electronics is re-quired. The enable inputs of all the BEROs are simply connected together. On programming, each device is informed about the number of BEROs in the network as well as its own position (ad-dress) in the network. When they have been wired up and the supply voltage has been connected, the BEROs automatically operate in multiplex mode.

SONPROG PC interface

Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device and the relevant software, the Sonar BEROs of compact ranges II, III and M18 can be individually adapted to

the respective application requirements. The device is an inter-face for the following tasks:• Checking the parameters of the Sonar BERO• Modifying the parameters of the Sonar BERO• Aligning the Sonar BERO to the application.

This enables a Sonar BERO to be optimized specifically for an application. The adjustments found can be saved or printed out to facilitate maintenance and documentation of the equipment.

When a Sonar BERO has been replaced, the new device can be programmed with the saved data quickly and easily. No new ad-justments are necessary.

The main parameters that can be set are:• Lower and upper limit of the operating range• Differential travel• Switching function NO or NC• Switching frequency• Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic• Analog characteristic, rising or falling• End of close range• End of sensing range• Mean value generation• Attenuation.

The function can also be set for the device:• Multiplex function• Temperature compensation• Diffuse or reflex sensor.

For a detailed description of the possible settings, see "SONPROG PC interface"

A special function mode enables the Sonar BERO to be adapted to applications with level measurements. See "Compact range for pump control".

Adjustment with potentiometers

The potentiometers are used to select the required limits (min. or max.) of the switching range.

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/16


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2

Circuit diagrams

Characteristics

Sound cones

The following diagrams are the results of measurements with So-nar BEROs, with their production-dependent scatter, at room conditions (20 °C). Standard reflectors moved radially are de-tected within the possible sensing range by the Sonar BEROs.

The diagrams apply to the individual types of sensor for the de-fined reflectors and for larger reflectors.• Measurement 1 with an aligned object, with the most optimum

reflection ⇒ keep environment free of objects which should not be detected.

• Measurement 2 with an object which has partially aligned sur-faces ⇒ detection of round materials and plates with rounded edges.

• Measurement 3 with an object with a plane surface moving perpendicularly to the sound cone ⇒ detection of plane sur-faces and edges.

Defined reflectors:• Measurements 1, 3: plane object

- 2 cm × 2 cm, for sensors with sensing ranges up to 130 cm- 10 cm × 10 cm, for sensors with larger sensing ranges

• Measurement 2: cylindrical object, 8 cm diameter.

The following pages show the sound cones for the following de-signs:• Compact range 0• Sonar thru-beam sensor• Compact range M18• Compact range I, II, III (M30).

SynchronizationNO function NC function

External multiplex modeNO function NC function

Internal multiplex mode (analog output)NO function NC function

!"

!"

#$%&% '

!"

(

!"

(

#$%&% '

!"

!"

)( *+

)( *+

!"

(

!"

(

)( *+

)( *+

!" ,

!" ,

#$%&% '

(!" ,

(!" ,

#$%&% '

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/17


Introduction

2

Compact range 0, sensing range 6 ... 30 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0

Measurement 2 (cylindrical object), attenuation 0 Measurement 3 (plane object), attenuation 0

Compact range 0, sensing range 20 ... 100 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0


K 65 compact form, sensing range 25 ... 250 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0


Sonar thru-beam sensor, sensing ranges 5 ... 40 cm, 5 ... 80 cm, 5 ... 150 cmReceiver angle 0 Variable receiver angle, optimally aligned

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

%1 % *

2%$ % *

%1 % *

2%$ % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

%1 % *

2%$ % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0 2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

%1 % *

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0 2%$ % *

%1 *% %/ % *

%/*%

2%$ % *

%1 *% %/ % *

%/*%

2%$ % *

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/18


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2

M18 compact range, sensing range 5 ... 30 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0


Measurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 2






Insufficient sensitivity

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%** -%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0 2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/19


Introduction

2

M18 compact range, sensing range 15 ... 100 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0








%1 % *

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

-.%**

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/20


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2

M18S compact range, sensing range 3 ... 20 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0

Measurement 2 (plane object), attenuation 0

M18S and K08 compact range, sensing range 5 ... 40 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0


M18S compact range, sensing range 10 ... 70 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0


! " # $

% %&'

(

)

(

! " # $

% %&'

)

! " # $

% %&'

(

)

(

! " # $

% %&'

)

*

! " # $

% %&'

(

) +

*

*

*

(

! " # $

% %&'

) *

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/21


Introduction

2

Compact ranges I to III, sensing range 6 ... 30 cmMeasurement 1 (most optimum reflection), attenuation 0









Note: only the sound cones with attenuation 0 apply to compact range I.

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%** +/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%** +/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/22


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2











%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0 2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/23


Introduction

2










%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0 2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/24


Introduction

Sonar BEROs

2










%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**+/0

2%$ % *

-%%**

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**

+/0

2%$ % *

%1 % *

-.%**

-%%**+/0

2%$ % *

+

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/25


Introduction

2

Further information

Active surface

The active surface of an ultrasonic proximity switch is the sur-face at which the ultrasound is emitted and received (IEC).

Reference axis

The reference axis is the axis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IEC).

Sensing range

The sensing range is understood to be the range within which the operating distance can be set (IEC).

With the Sonar BEROs, this is a range from 5 cm to 10 m de-pending on the type.

The construction of the sensor causes the ultrasonic beam to be emitted in the shape of a cone. Reflecting objects are only de-tected within this sound cone. Within the blind zone, which lies between the sensor surface and the sensing range, echoes can-not be evaluated for physical reasons.

Operating distance

The operating distance is the distance at which a change in sig-nal is caused at the output when the target approaches the ac-tive surface along the reference axis (IEC).

Rated operating distance sn

The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defin-ing the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC).

Real operating distance sr

The real operating distance is the operating distance of a partic-ular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC).

Accuracy

The accuracy is the permissible error that exists as the differ-ence between the true distance and the indicated value. The ac-curacy of a Sonar BERO depends on internal tolerances as well as certain physical parameters of the air such as humidity, atmo-spheric pressure and air movement. These parameters influ-ence the sound propagation time and therefore the measured value received.

Atmospheric pressure

Any other atmospheric changes at a permanent site will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. Between sea level and 3000 m altitude, the speed of sound is reduced by less than 1 %. Sound propagation is not possible in a vacuum.

Air humidity

At room temperature and at lower temperatures, the humidity will have a negligible effect on the sound propagation time. At higher temperatures, the speed of sound increases with humidity.

Air temperature

The sound propagation time is dependent on the air tempera-ture. An air temperature of 20 °C is used as the reference vari-able here. The speed of sound changes with air temperature by 0.17 %/K. This temperature dependent change in sound propa-gation time means that as the temperature increases, the dis-tance to the object appears to become shorter.

A change in temperature of, for example, +10 °C results in a change in the speed of sound of approximately +1.75 % and therefore a change in the operating distance of +1.75 %.

Gas types

The Sonar BERO is designed for operation in atmospheric air. If it is operated in other gases, different values for the speed of

sound and attenuation can result in significant measurement er-rors and even malfunction (e.g. in carbon dioxide).

Air currents

Changes to the speed of sound as a result of constant changes in the flow direction and flow velocity of the air cannot be quan-tified by means of a generally applicable formula. High-temper-ature objects, such as glowing metal cause air turbulence. This will scatter or deflect the ultrasound. An echo will not be gener-ated that can be evaluated.

The measured results are not affected by, e.g.:

Precipitation

Average levels of precipitation in the form of rain or snow will not adversely affect the functionality of the Sonar BERO. The trans-ducer surface should not, however, be wetted. Dewing is per-missible.

Spray paint

This has no determinable effect on the functioning of the Sonar BERO. To prevent any detrimental effect on the sensitivity of the transducer, however, the spray paint must not be allowed to set-tle on the active transducer surface.

External sound

External sound is distinguished from the system-specific echoes and does not usually cause malfunctions.

Repeat accuracy R

The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance sr at defined conditions (IEC).

The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 23 °C (± 5 °C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage.

The repeat accuracy of the Sonar BERO is 0.15 % of full-scale.

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/26


Compact ranges I to III

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

M30 form with fixed sensor

The Sonar BEROs of compact ranges I, II and III are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical M30 enclosure. They differ with regard to their range, their functional scope and their adjust-ment or programming capability.

Design

Standard version

In the standard version, the devices have a permanently in-stalled sensor.

Version with separate sensor

M30 form with separate sensor

Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is especially suitable in confined spaces.

The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure sep-arated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG6. 12, the sensor is installed in an M18 shell and in devices of type 3RG6. 13 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 25 mm in both cases.

Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of 1.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the M30 enclosure of the compact range is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclosure.

Version with swivel sensor

These devices correspond functionally to the other devices of compact ranges I to III. They are particularly suitable for appli-cations where the standard types cannot be used due to space limitations.

M30 form with swivel sensor

The ultrasonic sensor is hinged with a swivel arm to the tubular enclosure of the signal evaluator. This allows rotation about the cylinder axes as well as perpendicular movement at about 100 to the cylinder axis.

Passive reflector

With the Sonar BEROs of compact ranges I to III, a 3RX1 910 passive reflector can be clamped onto the sensor head (see "Accessories").

Where space is limited, objects can be detected which are per-pendicular to the Sonar BERO (which reduces the installation depth). The blind zone is then reduced by about 6 cm.

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/27


Compact ranges I to III

2

Functions

Range definition and adjustability

Objects within the preset operating range or analog range will be reliably detected causing the switching output or analog out-put to change state.

The blind zone must be kept clear of any objects since this might cause false outputs. Objects at a distance from the sensor that is outside the operating range limits will not be signaled at the switching output.

Sound cone

Operating modes

Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor

An object entering the sound cone from any direction causes the output signal to change when it enters the preset sensing range.

Reflex sensor

If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the Sonar BERO will be operated by all objects that lie between the Sonar BERO and the reflector even those that absorb sound.

Thru-beam sensors.

(Compact ranges II and III only)

The Sonar BERO only evaluates whether or not an object is lo-cated between the emitter and the receiver. The range of the ar-rangement is twice that of a single sensor.

Active measurement system

The propagation time of the ultrasonic signal is evaluated in or-der to determine the distance between the emitter and the re-ceiver. The range of the arrangement is twice that of a single sensor. The system is insensitive to objects in the measurement path as long as they do not totally shield the ultrasonic pulses of the emitter from the receiver.

Programming

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of compact ranges II and III can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.

The main parameters that can be changed are:• Lower and upper limit of the operating range• Differential travel• Switching function NO or NC• Switching frequency• Lower and upper limit of the analog range• Analog characteristic, rising or falling• End of close range• End of sensing range• Mean value generation• Multiplex function• Temperature compensation• Susceptibility.

The proximity switches can also be ordered with non-standard values. These values must be specified in plain text on ordering.


Sonar BERO Sound cone Object

Blind zone Sensing range

Initial value

(adust-able)

Set operating or analog range

(LED lit)

Final value

(adjust-able)

Type 3RG60 .2, 3RG61 .2 3RG60 0.3, 3RG61 0.3

3RG60 0.5, 3RG61 0.5

3RG60 0.4, 3RG61 0.4

3RG61 76

Sensing range cm 6 ... 30 20 ... 130 40 ... 300 60 ... 600 80 ... 1000

Standard target cm 1 × 1 2 × 2 5 × 5 10 × 10 10 × 10

Differential travel H mm 10 10 20 60 80

Repeat accuracy R mm ± 0,45 ± 2 ± 5 ± 9 ± 15

Operational voltage (DC) V 12 ... 30 (including ± 10 % residual ripple, at 12 ... 20 V susceptibility falls by approx. 20 %)

Rated operating current Ie

• NO contact mA 300 300

• NC contact mA 150 or 300 (see „Selection and ordering data“) 150

No-load supply current I0 mA Max. 50 Max. 75

Ultrasonic frequency f kHz 400 200 120 80 60

Switching frequency Hz 8 4 2 1 0,5

Response time ms 80 110 200 400 800

Power-up delay tv ms 280 280 280 280 280

Switching status display Yellow LED

Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface

Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor IP65 IP65

Ambient temperature

• During operation °C –25 ... +70

• During storage °C –40 ... +85

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/28


Compact range III

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

• Operates as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor• Adjustable using 2 potentiometers, with SONPROG 1) or per

teach-in• Foreground and background suppression• Synchronization capability, multiplex operation• Temperature compensation

• Solid-state outputs:- Switching output- Analog output

• Connection through M12, 5-pin connector1) Parameters can be preset to non-standard values. A programming

supplement will be charged in this case per unit.


Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Analog output Order No.

cm mA pnp

Fixed sensor3RG61 12–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3BF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3BF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 15–3BF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 14–3BF00

80 ... 1000 300 2 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 76–6BH00

3RG61 13–3..00 6 ... 30 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3BE00

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3BE00

40 ... 300 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 15–3BE00

60 ... 600 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 14–3BE00

80 ... 1000 150 2 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 76–6BG00

3RG61 15–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3CF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3CF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 15–3CF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 14–3CF00

80 ... 1000 300 2 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 76–6CH00

3RG61 14–3..00 6 ... 30 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3CE00

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3CE00

40 ... 300 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 15–3CE00

60 ... 600 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 14–3CE00

80 ... 1000 150 2 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 76–6CG00

3RG61 76–6..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 12–3GF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 13–3GF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 15–3GF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 14–3GF00

80 ... 1000 300 2 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 76–6GH00

6 ... 30 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 12–3GE00

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 13–3GE00

40 ... 300 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 15–3GE00

60 ... 600 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 14–3GE00

80 ... 1000 150 2 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 76–6GG00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/29


Compact range III

2


cm mA pnp

Swivel sensor3RG61 25–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3BF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 23–3BF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 25–3BF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 24–3BF00

6 ... 30 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 22–3BE00

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 23–3BE00

40 ... 300 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 25–3BE00

60 ... 600 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 24–3BE00

6 ... 30 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 22–3CF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 23–3CF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 25–3CF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 24–3CF00

6 ... 30 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 22–3CE00

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 23–3CE00

40 ... 300 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 25–3CE00

60 ... 600 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 24–3CE00

6 ... 30 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 22–3GF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 23–3GF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 25–3GF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 24–3GF00

6 ... 30 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 22–3GE00

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 23–3GE00

40 ... 300 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 25–3GE00

60 ... 600 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 24–3GE00

Separate sensor3RG61 12–3..01 6 ... 30 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3BF01

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3BF01

6 ... 30 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3BE01

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 4 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3BE01

6 ... 30 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3CF01

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3CF01

6 ... 30 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 12–3CE01

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 0 ... 20 mA 3RG61 13–3CE01

6 ... 30 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 12–3GF01

20 ... 130 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 13–3GF01

6 ... 30 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 12–3GE01

20 ... 130 150 1 NC 0 ... 10 V 3RG61 13–3GE01

AccessoriesSONPROG interface unit,AC 100 ... 240 V, DC 24 V

3RX4 000

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/30


Compact range II

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

• Operates as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor• Adjustable using 2 potentiometers, with SONPROG 1) or per

teach-in• Foreground and background suppression• Synchronization capability, multiplex operation• Temperature compensation

• Solid-state outputs:- 1 or 2 switching outputs- Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO!

• Connection through M12 connector- 4-pole (with 1 output)- 5-pole (with 2 outputs)

1) Parameters can be preset to non-standard values. A programming supplement will be charged in this case per unit.


Sensing range Rated operational current Switching output Frequency output Order No.

cm mA pnp

Fixed sensor3RG60 12–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO – 3RG60 12–3AF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO – 3RG60 13–3AF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO – 3RG60 15–3AF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO – 3RG60 14–3AF00

3RG60 13–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NC – 3RG60 12–3AE00

20 ... 130 300 1 NC – 3RG60 13–3AE00

40 ... 300 300 1 NC – 3RG60 15–3AE00

60 ... 600 300 1 NC – 3RG60 14–3AE00

3RG60 15–3..00 6 ... 30 300 2 NO – 3RG60 12–3AH00

20 ... 130 300 2 NO – 3RG60 13–3AH00

40 ... 300 300 2 NO – 3RG60 15–3AH00

60 ... 600 300 2 NO – 3RG60 14–3AH00

3RG60 14–3..00 6 ... 30 300 2 NC – 3RG60 12–3AG00

20 ... 130 300 2 NC – 3RG60 13–3AG00

40 ... 300 300 2 NC – 3RG60 15–3AG00

60 ... 600 300 2 NC – 3RG60 14–3AG00

6 ... 30 – – 30 ... 150 Hz 3RG60 12–3RS00

20 ... 130 – – 20 ... 130 Hz 3RG60 13–3RS00

40 ... 300 – – 20 ... 150 Hz 3RG60 15–3RS00

60 ... 600 – – 15 ... 150 Hz 3RG60 14–3RS00

Swivel sensor3RG60 25–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO – 3RG60 22–3AF00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO – 3RG60 23–3AF00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO – 3RG60 25–3AF00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO – 3RG60 24–3AF00

6 ... 30 300 1 NC – 3RG60 22–3AE00

20 ... 130 300 1 NC – 3RG60 23–3AE00

40 ... 300 300 1 NC – 3RG60 25–3AE00

60 ... 600 300 1 NC – 3RG60 24–3AE00

Separate sensor3RG60 12–3..01 6 ... 30 300 1 NO – 3RG60 12–3AF01

20 ... 130 300 1 NO – 3RG60 13–3AF01

6 ... 30 300 1 NC – 3RG60 12–3AE01

20 ... 130 300 1 NC – 3RG60 13–3AE01


3RX4 000

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/31


Compact range I

2

Overview

• Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor• Adjustable through 2 potentiometers

• Solid-state output:- Switching output

• Connection through M12 connector, 3-pin or 4-pin



cm mA pnp

Fixed sensor3RG60 12–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO – 3RG60 12–3AD00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO – 3RG60 13–3AD00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO – 3RG60 15–3AD00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO – 3RG60 14–3AD00

3RG60 15–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NC – 3RG60 12–3AC00

20 ... 130 300 1 NC – 3RG60 13–3AC00

40 ... 300 300 1 NC – 3RG60 15–3AC00

60 ... 600 300 1 NC – 3RG60 14–3AC00

3RG60 13–3..00

3RG60 14–3..00

Swivel sensor3RG60 25–3..00 6 ... 30 300 1 NO – 3RG60 22–3AD00

20 ... 130 300 1 NO – 3RG60 23–3AD00

40 ... 300 300 1 NO – 3RG60 25–3AD00

60 ... 600 300 1 NO – 3RG60 24–3AD00

6 ... 30 300 1 NC – 3RG60 22–3AC00

20 ... 130 300 1 NC – 3RG60 23–3AC00

40 ... 300 300 1 NC – 3RG60 25–3AC00

60 ... 600 300 1 NC – 3RG60 24–3AC00

Separate sensor3RG60 12–3..01 6 ... 30 300 1 NO – 3RG60 12–3AD01

20 ... 130 300 1 NO – 3RG60 13–3AD01

6 ... 30 300 1 NC – 3RG60 12–3AC01

20 ... 130 300 1 NC – 3RG60 13–3AC01

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/32


Configuring for compact ranges I to III

Sonar BEROs

2

Dimension drawings

With fixed sensor3RG 6. 12–3..00 3RG 6. 13–3..00

3RG 6. 15–3..00 3RG 6. 14–3..00

With swivel sensor3RG 6. 22–3..00 3RG 6. 23–3..00

3RG 6. 25–3..00 3RG 6. 24–3..00

With separate sensor Spherical3RG 6. 12–3..01 3RG 6. 13–3..01 3RG 61 76–6..00

NS

D00

778

M 12x1

10,5

M 30x1,5

SW

36

8013

1

27,3

M 3

0x1,

5S

W 3

633

19

47,534

9915

0

NS

D00

779

M 12x110

,5

27,3

2135

6534

153

M 3

0x1,

5S

W 3

6

101

NS

D00

780

M 12x1

10,5

27,3

M 30x1,5

SW 368013

112

30

2818

105°

45°

NS

D00

783

M 12x1

10,5

27,3

M 30x1,5

SW 368013

112

47,5

3418

100°

35°

NS

D00

784

M 12x1

10,5

27,3

NS

D00

785

M 30x1,5

SW 368013

112

25°

65

3718

95°

M 12x1

10,5

27,3

- .3

4

- .

3

3

- .

4

(' '0$3 *

4

- .3

- .3

4

- .

3

3

(' '0$3 *

8,510

°26

112

102

10°138

160

6990

160

NS

D00

781

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/33


Configuring for compact ranges I to III

2

Circuit diagrams

Compact range I

View from rear onto device

Compact range II

Compact range II with 2 switching outputs

Compact range III

5

5

(

NO or frequency output

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/34


M18 compact range

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

M18 form

The Sonar BEROs of compact range M18 are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure.• Operates as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor or thru-beam sensor• Adjustable using 2 potentiometers, with SONPROG interface

device or per teach-in• Foreground and background suppression• Synchronization capability, multiplex operation• Temperature compensation• Solid-state outputs:

- Switching output- Analog output- Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO!

• Connection through M12, 4-pin connector

Design

The devices of compact range M18 are always supplied with permanently installed sensors.

Functions

The devices are suitable for operation as diffuse sensor, reflex sensor and thru-beam sensor. The sensors can be supplied with switching, analog or frequency outputs.

Up to 10 sensors of the M18 compact range can be synchro-nized with each other through the enable inputs. The devices are also suitable for multiplex mode.

For a detailed description, see „Compact ranges I to III“.

Programming

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of compact range M18 can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.




Type 3RG62 32 3RG62 33

Sensing range cm 5 ... 30 15 ... 100

Standard target cm 1 × 1 2 × 2

Differential travel H mm 10

Repeat accuracy R mm ± 1 ± 2


Rated operating current Ie mA 150

No-load supply current I0 mA Max. 60




Power-up delay tv ms 280 280


Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface


Ambient temperature



Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/35


M18 compact range

2


Dimension drawing

Circuit diagram

Sensing range Rated operational cur-rent

Switching output Analog/ frequency output

Order No.

cm mA pnp

5 ... 30 150 1 NO – 3RG62 32–3AB00

15 ... 100 1 NO – 3RG62 33–3AB00

5 ... 30 1 NC – 3RG62 32–3AA00

15 ... 100 1 NC – 3RG62 33–3AA00

5 ... 30 – – 4 ... 20 mA 3RG62 32–3LS00

15 ... 100 – 4 ... 20 mA 3RG62 33–3LS00

5 ... 30 – 0 ... 20 mA 3RG62 32–3TS00

15 ... 100 – 0 ... 20 mA 3RG62 33–3TS00

5 ... 30 – – 0 ... 10 V 3RG62 32–3JS00

15 ... 100 – 0 ... 10 V 3RG62 33–3JS00

5 ... 30 – 250 ... 1500 Hz 3RG62 32–3RS00

15 ... 100 – 150 ... 1000 Hz 3RG62 33–3RS00


3RX4 000

3RG 62 3.–3A.00 3RG 62 3.–3.S00

LED(4x)

M 18x1

65

NSD00776

90,5

104

(-3)

SW

24

472

,5

Poti

LED(4x)

M 18x1

65

NSD00775

90,5

104

(-3)

SW

24

4


Siemens FS 10 · 20042/36


M18 S compact range

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

M18 S form

The Sonar BEROs of compact range M18 S are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a cylindrical enclosure.• Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor• Adjustable per teach-in (only with switching output)• Solid-state outputs:

- Switching output- Frequency output, suitable for connection to LOGO!

• Connection through M12, 4-pin connector

Design

Compact range M18 S can be supplied with an aligned sensor head or an angled sensor head. The small physical size of the sensors makes them ideal for applications where space is lim-ited.

Functions

Available as diffuse sensors and reflex sensors. The sensors can be supplied with switching or frequency outputs. Due to their wide range and a minimized close range, they are suitable for a wide variety of applications.

Programming

The sensors with a switching output can be set through the de-vice terminals by means of a teach-in function. Setting is not possible for sensors with a frequency output. Evaluation can be performed in a PLC or in a LOGO! mini PLC.


Type 3RG64 .2 3RG64 .1 3RG64 0.3

Sensing range mm 30 ... 200 or 0 ... 200 50 ... 400 or 0 ... 400 100 ... 700 or 0 ... 700

Adjustment range mm 50 ... 200 or 120 ... 220 60 .. 400 or 155 ... 435 150 ... 700 or 350 ... 750

Standard target cm 2 × 2 2 × 2 2 × 2

Differential travel H mm 10 or 2 10 or 2 10 or 3

Repeat accuracy R mm ± 1 (frequency output ± 2.5) ± 2,5)

Operational voltage (DC) V 20 ... 30 (including ± 10 % residual ripple)



Ultrasonic frequency kHz 400 300 200

Switching frequency f Hz 10 8 5

Response time ms 50 100 100

Power-up delay tv ms 20 20 20


Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated; CRASTIN converter cover; epoxy resin converter surface


Ambient temperature



Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/37


M18 S compact range

2


Dimension drawings

Circuit diagrams


Switching output Operating mode/ fre-quency output

Order No.

cm mA pnp

Straight sensor3 ... 20 150 1 NO Diffuse sensor 3RG64 32–3AB00

5 ... 40 1 NO Diffuse sensor 3RG64 31–3AB00


0 ... 20 150 1 NO Reflex sensor 3RG64 32–3BB00

0 ... 40 1 NO Reflex sensor 3RG64 31–3BB00


3 ... 20 – – 400 ... 1600 Hz 200 ... 800 Hz

3RG64 32–3RS00

5 ... 40 – 240 ... 1600 Hz 60 ... 400 Hz

3RG64 31–3RS00

10 ... 70 – 300 ... 1400 Hz 150 ... 700 Hz

3RG64 33–3RS00

Angled sensor3 ... 20 150 1 NO Diffuse sensor 3RG64 22–3AB00



0 ... 20 150 1 NO Reflex sensor 3RG64 22–3BB00



3 ... 20 – – 400 ... 1600 Hz 200 ... 800 Hz

3RG64 22–3RS00

5 ... 40 – 240 ... 1600 Hz 60 ... 400 Hz

3RG64 21–3RS00

10 ... 70 – 300 ... 1400 Hz 150 ... 700 Hz

3RG64 23–3RS00

AccessoriesTeach-In adapter 3RX4 010

3RG64 2. (angled sensor)

3RG64 3. (straight sensor)


Siemens FS 10 · 20042/38


Compact range for pump control

Sonar BEROs

2

Area of application

M18 and M30 forms (compact range II)

The Sonar BEROs of forms M30 and M18 with a switching output are suitable for pump controls, e.g. for applications with auto-mated filling or emptying.

In the case of the M30 form, the standard device with a fixed sensor head as well as the devices with separate or swivel sen-sor heads can be used.

Functions

Automatic emptying

A Sonar BERO with NO function is used for this purpose.

The fill level rises and approaches the Sonar BERO:

The switching output is inactive while the level approaches the Sonar BERO before the maximum fill height is reached. When the maximum level is reached, the Sonar BERO switches the pump on and automatic emptying is performed until the mini-mum level is reached (dry running protection). During emptying, the switching output remains active.

Automatic filling

A Sonar BERO with NC function is used for this purpose.

The fill level falls and moves away from the Sonar BERO:

The switching level remains inactive as long as the falling fill level has not reached the minimum fill height. When the minimum level is reached, the Sonar BERO switches the pump on and auto-matic filling is performed until the maximum level is reached. During filling, the switching output remains active.

Programming

The devices can be switched to fill level mode by means of the SONPROG interface unit.

The existing potentiometers, SONPROG software or teach-in keys of the SONPROG interface device can be used to set the lower and upper limits of the operating range.

With the M30 form, both the lower and upper limit of the operat-ing range can be set using the potentiometers, but only the lower limit can be set with the M18 form; the start is fixed in the latter case. It is important to set a mean value. Mean value generation over 100 measured values is recommended as standard.

The required parameters can also be set at the factory. For this purpose, the Order No. must be supplemented by "–Z". Further-more, "Z = fill level software" and the required parameters should be specified in plain text:• NO (automatic emptying) or NC (automatic filling)• Fill level limits adjustable by potentiometers or permanently

programmed, then:- Lower limit of operating range (maximum fill level)- Upper limit of operating range (minimum fill level)

• Mean value.

! "

#

$ ! "

! "

#

$ ! "

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/39


K08 compact form

2

Overview

The Sonar BEROs of K 08 compact form are ready-to-use all-in-one units with a rectangular metal enclosure.• 3 versions with different operating modes:

- Diffuse sensors with background suppression- Relex sensor- Thru-beam sensor:

• Diffuse sensor and reflex sensor:

- Up to 6 devices can be synchronized- Adjustment per teach-in

• Solid-state outputs:- 1 pnp and 1 npn switching output- NO/NC adjustable

• Connection through M12 connector, 5-pin, rotatable by 90°



Dimension drawings Circuit diagrams

Type 3RG64 51–3CC00 3RG64 51–3DC00 3RG64 51–3SB00

Operating mode Diffuse sensor Reflex sensor Thru-beam sensor:

Sensing range mm 50 ... 400 0 ... 400 0 ... 800

Adjustment range mm 60 ... 400 60 ... 400 0 ... 800


Differential travel H mm 10 2 –

Repeat accuracy R mm ± 1 ± 1 –






Response time ms 100 100 100


Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Operational voltage Green LED

Enclosure material Metal


Ambient temperature




Switching output Operating mode Order No.

mm mA pnp + npn

Cubic form50 ... 400 150 1 selectable

NO/NC contact eachDiffuse sensor B 3RG64 51-3CC00

0 ... 400 150 1 selectable NO/NC contact each

Reflex sensor B 3RG64 51-3DC00

– – – Thru-beam sensor emit-ter

3RG64 51-3NN00

0 ... 800 150 1 NO contact each Thru-beam sensor receiver

B 3RG64 51-3SB00

M 1

2 ×

1

8 10

1515

,6

M 4

LED YE

LED GN38

4,6

6 4,5

2448

65

NSD0_00822

Trans-ducer


%

&

'

(

%

) *

)

%

+ , - %

+ , -

% . + , - .

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/40


Compact range 0

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

Compact range 0 with separate and fixed sensors

The Sonar BEROs of compact range 0 are all-in-one units with a rectangular enclosure, and are ready for connection. They are available with two sensing ranges.• Operates as diffuse sensor• Adjustable by potentiometer• Can be synchronized• Temperature compensation• Solid-state outputs:

- Switching output- Analog output

• Connection through M12 connector, Type F

Design

The devices of compact range 0 are supplied in the standard version with permanently installed sensors.

The devices of compact range 0 can also be supplied with sep-arate sensors. Due to its small dimensions, the sensor is espe-cially suitable in confined spaces.

The ultrasonic sensor is installed in a cylindrical enclosure sep-arated from the other electronics. In devices of type 3RG63 42, the sensor is installed in an M18 shell and in devices of type 3RG63 43 it is installed in an M30 shell with a length of 25 mm in both cases.

Two nuts are supplied for fixing. The connecting lead of approx-imately 1.6 m in length is cast onto the sensor. The connection to the evaluation electronics located in the enclosure of compact range 0 is established through the preassembled coaxial cable plug. The mating socket is installed on the end face of the enclo-sure.

Functions

Compact range 0 is designed for simple applications. The de-vices are only suitable for operation as diffuse sensors.

The sensors can be supplied with analog outputs. The end of operating range or analog range can be set using a potentio-meter.

Up to 6 devices can be synchronized with each other.


Type 3RG63 42 3RG63 43Sensing range cm 6 ... 30 20 ... 100

Standard target cm 1 × 1 2 × 2

Differential travel H mm 5 10

Repeat accuracy R mm ± 0.45 ± 1.5









Enclosure material CRASTIN; epoxy resin converter surface

Degree of protection IP65; IP68 with separate sensor

Ambient temperature

• During operation °C 0 ... +55


Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/41


Compact range 0

2


Dimension drawings

Circuit diagrams


Switching output Analog output Order No.

cm mA pnp

Fixed sensor6 ... 30 100 1 NO – 3RG63 42–3AB00

20 ... 100 100 1 NO – 3RG63 43–3AB00

6 ... 30 100 1 NC – 3RG63 42–3AA00

20 ... 100 100 1 NC – 3RG63 43–3AA00

6 ... 30 100 – 0 ... 10 V 3RG63 42–3JK00

20 ... 100 100 – 0 ... 10 V 3RG63 43–3JK00

Separate sensor6 ... 30 100 1 NO – 3RG63 42–3AB01

20 ... 100 100 1 NO – 3RG63 43–3AB01

6 ... 30 100 1 NC – 3RG63 42–3AA01

20 ... 100 100 1 NC – 3RG63 43–3AA01

6 ... 30 100 – 0 ... 10 V 3RG63 42–3JK01

20 ... 100 100 – 0 ... 10 V 3RG63 43–3JK01

3RG 63 4.–3..00 3RG 63 4.–3..01

Type A B

3RG63 42–3..01

3RG63 43–3..01

M18

M30

SW 24

SW 36

!

"

#

!


! " # "

! $ % $ $ " # "

$%

&'('

)

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/42


3SG16 compact form

Sonar BEROs

2

Overview

3SG16 compact form

The Sonar BERO in compact form for DC is a complete, factory-assembled unit, ready for connection. It cannot be combined with devices from the compact ranges and modular range.• Operates as diffuse sensor or reflex sensor• Foreground and background suppression• Adjustable using plug-in jumpers• Solid-state outputs:

- 2 switching outputs• Terminal compartment with screw terminals

Design

All components are located into a single box-shaped enclosure. The ultrasonic converter and the terminal compartment are ar-ranged on the same enclosure level.

The electrical connections are made with screw terminals in the terminal compartment; cable entry is through an M20 cable gland.

Aligning unit

To make it easier to align the Sonar BERO with the object to be detected, a 3SX6 287 aligning unit is available.

This unit allows swiveling about a horizontal and a vertical axis with an angle of rotation in each case of up to 30.

Functions

Range definition and adjustability

The Sonar BERO outputs a signal while an object is located in the set operating range or inhibit range within an aperture angle of approximately 5 degrees (see figure below).

The sensing range between 0.2 and 1 m is subdivided into 8 equal operating ranges of 0.1 m. Each operating range B1 to B8 can be selected using a connector in the terminal compartment.

The Sonar BERO signals with one output and one LED in each case whether objects are located in the set operating range or in the so-called inhibit range that precedes it.

With the help of the supplied programming plug, two to eight of the separate operating ranges (B1 to B8) can be combined to form an extended operating range.

One programming plug is required for each operating range which can in each case only be connected to the immediately adjacent range. The plug is fitted to a pin connector in the termi-nal compartment of the device. The possible pin assignments are shown in the cover of the terminal compartment.

Operating modes

Standard operating mode, diffuse sensor

The Sonar BERO switches when an object enters the sound cone from any direction, output 14 (NO) outputs a 1-signal if the object is located within a set operating range (B1 to B8). Output 24 (SX) outputs a 1-signal if the object is in the inhibit range. Ob-jects in the blind zone do not cause a utilizable signal change on outputs 14 and 24.

Reflex sensor

If a reflector is permanently fixed within a set operating range, the ultrasonic beam will be interrupted by all objects in the inhibit range even those that absorb sound.

In this case, output 14 (NO) changes to the 0-signal. In the case of reflective objects in the inhibit range, output 24 (SX) changes to the 1-signal at the same time.

Series and parallel connection

Series connection of the Sonar BERO (terminal 2 or 4) is possi-ble. The voltage drops must, however, be taken into account.

Parallel connection of the outputs is also possible. If the Sonar BEROs that are in parallel are connected to different power sup-ply units, the outputs must be decoupled by diodes (diodes for 300 mA, 150 to 300 V control voltage, recommended diode type, e.g. 1N4004).

Blind zone

Soundconeapprox. 5°

Sensing range(selectable operating rangesvia jumpers in terminalcompartment)

Set operating rangee. g. 0.8 to 0.9 mOutput 1 (green LED)

Blocking range: Output 2 (red LED)

NS

D0_

0075

4

0 0,2 0,8 0,9 1 m

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B8B7

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/43


3SG16 compact form

2



Dimension drawings

Circuit diagram

Sensing range cm 20 ... 100

Standard target cm 2 × 2

Differential travel H mm 10

Repeat accuracy R mm ± 2


No-load supply current I0 mA < 60

Switching output

• Rated operating current Ie mA 150

• Voltage drop V 2

• Residual current mA 0.01

Ultrasonic frequency kHz 200

Switching frequency f Hz 4

Response time ms 120

Power-up delay tv ms 280




Ambient temperature

• During operation °C –25 ... 70

• During storage °C –40 ... 85


Switching output Connection Order No.

cm mA pnp

20 ... 100 150 2 NO Terminal compartment 3SG16 67–1BJ87

AccessoriesAligning unit 3SX6 287

%&'

'!

(!)'!

*

!'

&'

!!

+'

(((

"

&'('

&'('

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/44


K65 compact form

Sonar BEROs

2

Area of application

K65 compact form

The Sonar BEROs of the K 65 compact form are ready-to-use complete self-contained units. They operate with a DC supply. Their enclosure design and function makes them ideal for level applications in small containers.

The devices feature two switching outputs (Smin and Smax) to which different distances can be assigned. This allows, for ex-ample, the minimum and maximum fill level in a tank to be eval-uated. The values are set using the SONPROG interface device or by means of automatic alignment (teach-in function).

Design

All components are located in a box-shaped enclosure with rounded edges. The ultrasonic converter is mounted in the en-closure – slightly recessed – in the enclosure. The integrated en-circulating sealing ring allows the Sonar BERO to be used as a plug with integrated level measuring.

The tank opening must have a minimum diameter of 26 mm. It can be fixed to the tank by means of two M5 screws.

The electric connection is made using a 5-pin connector with M12 thread.

Functions

Sensors with switching or analog output

Within the sensing range, the fill level of a container is detected. If the fill level reaches one of the two switching thresholds (Smin,Smax), the corresponding output is set. On emptying or filling, the switching outputs remain set in accordance with the differential travel (Hmin, Hmax). This is signaled by the corresponding LED. If the level is located between the two operating ranges, both outputs are reset (see "Definition of the ranges").

Definition of the ranges

Blind zone

Objects at close range cause fault signals, so the user must in-stall the sensor such that the fill level cannot enter close range.

Programming

For optimizing to the operating conditions, all sensors of compact form K 65 can be programmed using a PC and the SONPROG 3RX4 000 interface device.



$ & ' !

(

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

& % * + $

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/45


K65 compact form

2



Type 3RG62 52 3RG62 53 3RG62 55

Sensing range cm 6 ... 50 20 ... 150 25 ... 250


Switching threshold

• Smax cm 8 25 35

• Smin cm 45 140 230

Differential travel H

• Hmax (adjustable) cm 2 5 10

• Hmin (adjustable) cm 10 10 20

Operational voltage (DC) V 12 ... 30 (including ± 10 % residual ripple, at 12 ... 20 V susceptibility falls by approx. 20%)


Switching output


• Voltage drop V 2

• Switching element function Smax NO contact

• Switching element function Smin NO/NC programmable


Measuring time ms 20 25 50

Displays

• Switching status 2 yellow LEDs

• Operational voltage Green LED



Ambient temperature

• During operation –25 ... 70

• During storage –40 ... 85

Sensing range Rated operational current

Switching output Analog/ frequency output

Connection Order No.

cm mA pnp

6 ... 50 150 2 NO – M12 connector 3RG62 52–3AH00



6 ... 50 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA M12 connector 3RG62 52–3BF00

20 ... 150 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA M12 connector 3RG62 53–3BF00

25 ... 250 300 1 NO 4 ... 20 mA M12 connector B 3RG62 55–3BF00

6 ... 50 300 1 NO 0 ... 20 mA M12 connector 3RG62 52–3CF00



6 ... 50 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V M12 connector 3RG62 52–3GF00

20 ... 150 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V M12 connector B 3RG62 53–3GF00

25 ... 250 300 1 NO 0 ... 10 V M12 connector B 3RG62 55–3GF00

6 ... 30 300 1 NO 20 ... 150 Hz M12 connector 3RG62 52–3RS00

20 ... 150 300 1 NO 20 ... 130 Hz M12 connector 3RG62 53–3RS00

25 ... 250 300 1 NO 12,5 ... 125 Hz M12 connector 3RG62 55–3RS00


3RX4 000

Teach-In adapter 3RX4 010

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/46


K65 compact form

Sonar BEROs

2

Dimension drawings

Circuit diagrams

Sensors with switching output

Connection Automatic alignment

View from rear onto device View from rear onto device

XI must be connected to L– for the automatic alignment.

*

$%

+

+,

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/47


Sonar thru-beam sensor

2

Overview


The sonar thru-beam sensor comprises an ultrasonic emitter and a receiver. The emitter and receiver circuits are installed in sep-arate box-shaped enclosures of molded plastic.• Operation as thru-beam sensor• 3 measurement ranges can be set• Solid-state output:

- Switching output• Connection

- With 3 m cable- With M8 connector, 4-pole- With M12 connector, 4-pole

Functions

Thru-beam sensor mode

The emitter of the sonar thru-beam sensor emits a narrowly fo-cused continuous tone in the direction of the receiver.

The receiver located opposite evaluates this ultrasonic signal. Interruption of the tone by an object will cause the output signal to change.

Adjustment of sensitivity

The sensitivity can be adjusted at the receiver module at termi-nal 2 (NO version) or 4 (NC version).

Object detection

The minimum size of detectable objects depends on the dis-tance between emitter and receiver. If the distance is less than 40 cm, objects 2 cm or larger will be detected. The gap with be-tween two objects must be at least 3 mm.

If the distance is shorter, gaps of <1 mm can even be detected. At maximum distance, objects greater than 4 cm in size can be detected. In this case the gaps between the objects must be >1 cm.

Arrangement


XI Switching fre-quency

Emitter/receiver distance

Hz cm

Not connected 100 < 150

L– 150 < 80

L+ 200 < 40

+

-&./!+

Type 3RG62 43–.P (receiver) 3RG62 43–.N (emitter)

Sensing range cm – 5 ... 150

Standard target

• Up to 40 cm cm 2 × 2

• Over 40 cm cm 1 × 1


Rated operating current Ie mA 100 –

No-load supply current I0 mA < 20 < 30

Ultrasonic frequency kHz – 200

Switching frequency f

• Up to 40 cm Hz 200 –

• Up to 80 cm Hz 150 –

• Up to 150 cm Hz 100 –

Response time

• Up to 40 cm ms 2 –

• Up to 80 cm ms 1.5 –

• Up to 150 cm ms 1 –

Power-up delay tv ms < 40

Status indication Green LED



Ambient temperature

• During operation °C 0 ... 70


Siemens FS 10 · 20042/48



Sonar BEROs

2


Dimension drawings

Circuit diagrams



cm mA pnp

5 ... 150 100 1 NO Cable, 3 m 3RG62 43–0PB00

5 ... 150 100 1 NC Cable, 3 m 3RG62 43–0PA00

5 ... 150 – Emitter Cable, 3 m 3RG62 43–0NN00

5 ... 150 100 1 NO M 8 connector 3RG62 43–7PB00

5 ... 150 100 1 NC M 8 connector 3RG62 43–7PA00

5 ... 150 – Emitter M 8 connector 3RG62 43–7NN00

5 ... 150 100 1 NO M12 connector 3RG62 43–3PB00

5 ... 150 100 1 NC M12 connector 3RG62 43–3PA00

5 ... 150 – Emitter M12 connector 3RG62 43–0NN00

3RG62 43–0..00 3RG62 43–3..00, 3RG62 43–7..00

*

*

0

*

*

0


1

1

!+

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/49


Double-layer sheet monitoring

2

Overview

Double-layer sheet monitoring with separate sensors

The 3RX2 210 Sonar BERO for double-layer sheet monitoring comprises one signal evaluator and two Sonar sensors (emitter and receiver).• Reliable detection of multiple layers of paper, plastic sheets or

metal foil• Measuring range from 20 g paper to 1100 g card• Manual or automatic offset• Sonar sensors in M18 enclosure• Short-circuit proof electronic outputs (pnp)• Connection through M12 connector.

Design

The emitter and receiver sensors are of the same type and must be mounted at an angle of 30° (±10°) or 5° to the vertical. The setting is made using the internal S2 switch. If the system is op-erated at an inclination angle of 5° to 20°, the S2 switch (operat-ing mode) must be set to position "1".

The object to be detected must be located approximately 5 to 15 mm above the emitter. A wider mounting angle increases the flutter range, e. g. at an angle of 40°, fluttering within 60 % of the measuring range is permitted.

The spacing between the emitter and receiver must be at least 20 mm and can be up to 60 mm. Precise alignment is essential (±1°). The operating range is reduced if they are not aligned along the axis.

Sensor mounting

Functions

These devices are used mainly for monitoring sheets of paper as well as plastic and metal film. Each layer is compared to the stored reference value and indicated as a single or double layer accordingly.

The 3RX2 210 signal evaluator continuously signals the situation between the sonar sensors at the two outputs A1 and A2. Output A1 "Single layer" remains active as long as only one layer is lo-cated between the sensors. Output A2 "Double layer" is acti-vated as soon as two or more layers are detected between the sensors. Two LEDs also indicate the status of the outputs. The yellow LED A1 indicates a single layer and the red LED A2 indi-cates a double layer.

Programming

The signal evaluator can be set to two different modes.

User interface

Manual setting

Switch S1 (setting) is in position "1".

The sensor is set up for the material to be sensed either by pressing the "SET" button on the top of the device or by applying a control command to the "SET" input of the M12 connector (pin 5). The value obtained remains stored until the setting pro-cedure is repeated. The sensor is set by placing a single layer between the sonar sensors and activating the "SET" command.

The 3RX2 210 requires max. 100 ms for the setting; i.e. the "SET" key must be pressed for this time, or a "1" signal (> 6 V) must be present at pin 5. The green LED "SET" flashes during the setting. It lights up permanently following successful setting.

Automatic setting

Switch S1 (setting) is in position "0" (factory setting).

Setting can be performed as described above or automatically when a layer is fed in and the supply voltage is applied if a layer lies between the sensors at this moment.

Automatic setting is performed when a layer is fed in following an interval of 2 s during which a layer was not detected between the sonar sensors.

!

!

" # # # $

%" ###& ''

"###''

(

) % ! * + ! ) % ,

- # # .

! /

% %

! ! /

! /

! %

! %

! !

/

! !

( 0

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/50


Double-layer sheet monitoring

Sonar BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Sensing range mm 20 ... 60

Material strength (paper, cardboard) G 20 ... 1100


No-load supply current I0 mA < 75

Switching output


• Voltage drop at 200 mA V < 3

Ultrasonic frequency kHz 200


Response time ms 5

Switching status display Red and yellow LEDs

Enclosure material

• Evaluation unit Metal

• Sensor Brass, nickel-plated; epoxy resin converter surface


Ambient temperature

• During operation °C 0 ... 65




cm mA pnp

2 ... 6 200 2 NO M12 connector 3RX2 210

Evaluation unit Sensor

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/51

BERO Proximity SwitchesAccessories for Sonar BERO

SONPROG interface device

2

Overview

PC with SONPROG interface device and Sonar BERO

Using the SONPROG 3RX4 000 PC interface device and the relevant software, the following Sonar BEROs can be individually adapted to the respective applica-

tion requirements:• Compact ranges II and III• Compact range M18• K 65 compact form.

Scope of supply• PC-Interface,• Plug-in power supply• Connecting leads to the PC and Sonar BERO• SONPROG software for Windows.

Functions

The SONPROG 3RX4 000 programming device allows the user to program several Sonar BEROs simultaneously. The lower and upper limit of the operating range can be saved at the click of a button for copying to other Sonar BEROs.

For each Sonar BERO, the following parameters can be set:• Lower and upper limit of the operating range• Differential travel• Switching function NO or NC• Switching frequency• Lower and upper limit of the analog characteristic• Analog characteristic, rising or falling• End of close range• End of sensing range• Mean value generation• Attenuation.

The function can also be set for the device:• Multiplex function• Temperature compensation• Function as diffuse or reflex sensor• Fill level mode (see "Compact range for pump control").

The programmed values are saved in the Sonar BERO and are retained even without interface or after the supply voltage has been disconnected.

The programmed values can be printed out and recorded. They will then be immediately available, for example, for series appli-cations or for replacement of the Sonar BERO.

Parameters

Operating range

The commands "Lower limit of operating range" and "Upper limit of operating range" are used to define a window within the sens-ing range of the Sonar BERO.

If an object enters the operating range, the switching output is active (with NO contact). If an object is outside the operating range, the switching output is not active.

In the case of Sonar BEROs of compact range II with two switch-ing outputs, the second switching output is active when an ob-ject is located between the blind zone and the operating range.

Sound cone

Differential travel

The differential travel can be adjusted to move the switch-on point and the switch-off point at the limits of the operating range away from each other. This prevents output flutter and level con-trol tasks can be solved elegantly.

Example: Fill level monitoring with adjustable differential travel

Switching element function

The function of the switching output that was set at the factory can be changed, e.g. from NO to NC.

The pin assignments are not changed. This means that the switching output remains at pin 4 even if a device is changed from NO to NC function.

Switching frequency

The Sonar BERO can be switched over from standard switching frequency (in accordance with the technical specifications) and rapid switching frequency (3 times the standard value).

Attention: A Sonar BERO with a rapid switching fre-quency is more sensitive to disturbance.

Sonar BERO Sound cone Object

Blind zone Sensing range

Initial value

(adust-able)

Set operating or analog range

(LED lit)

Final value

(adjust-able)

1)Inhibit range 2)Switching range 3)Sensing range 4)Blind zone 5)Switching output upper limit – when level falls 6)Switching output upper limit – when level rises 7)Switching output lower limit – when level falls 8)Switching output lower limit – when level rises

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/52


SONPROG interface device

Accessories for Sonar BERO

2

Analog distance measurement

BEROs with an analog output can detect the distance to an ob-ject. This distance is converted to an analog output signal that is proportional to it (0 ... 10 V, 0 ... 20 mA or 4 ... 20 mA). The reso-lution of the analog output is at least 1 mm within the preset lim-its.

Example

Blind zone

A value must not be set for the blind zone that is less than the minimum value. This is the time that the Sonar BERO requires to switch over from send to receive mode.

The blind zone can be moved away from the Sonar BERO (i.e. increased) to permit interfering objects in the foreground to be ignored. The interfering echo resulting from such an object is suppressed by extending the blind zone, and detection of the desired object is possible again. The range of the Sonar BERO can be reduced in this case because part of the echo from the object to be detected is suppressed. However, objects are still not permitted within the original blind zone.

It is important to ensure with this setting the object does not re-flect ultrasound so well that double or triple echoes arise that give the impression of a more distant object. (a fault of this kind cannot occur during normal operation because only the first echo is accepted as valid).

Sensing range

Reducing the sensing range can enhance the resolution of the Sonar BERO. With large sensing ranges, it is not possible to ad-just some values in steps of one millimeter. The minimum resolu-tion of a Sonar BERO is 1 mm.

Mean value generation

Unfortunate reflective conditions or moving surfaces (e.g. in the case of moving liquids and bulk material on conveyors) can cause the measured values to change continuously which re-sults in constant switching. The Sonar BERO allows a mean value to be generated from up to 255 measurements.

Failed signals (when no object is in the sensing range) are ig-nored on mean-value generation. After each measurement, a mean value is generated immediately from the new measured value and the stored number of old values. The response time of the Sonar BERO is, therefore, not extended. A delay only occurs at the end of a measurement if the object is removed from the sensing range. This delay corresponds to the measurement cy-cle time multiplied by the saved number of mean values.

Sensitivity (see „Sound cones“)

The susceptibility of the receive amplifier is reduced here. Weakly reflecting objects at the edge of the sound cone are sup-pressed. It is also possible to reduce the size of the sound cone here electronically. The permitted values are 0 (maximum sensi-tivity) to 7 (minimum sensitivity).

Teach-in

All Sonar BEROs of compact ranges II, III and M18 can now be adjusted to the limits of the operating range by means of a teach-in function. For this purpose, the Order No. must be supple-mented by "–0DT0".

Teach-in is activated with a Low signal (0 V) on terminal XI. This can be applied through a key or jumper; teach-in can also be made with an electronic signal (e.g. PLC output). The signal is non-time-critical; the duration must be longer than 150 ms.

Various adjustments can be implemented using the SONPROG V2.x software. The user can select which value is to be taught. In compact ranges II and III, the selection can also be made with the potentiometer (set using SONPROG)

The following adjustments can be implemented using the SON-PROG V2.x software:• Teach-in mode:

- Enabled- Disabled

• Teach-in mode (adjustable by potentiometer) for:- Start of range- End of range

M18 compact range

For sensors with a switching output, the switching limit is taught that was specified in the SONPROG programming (setting as supplied: maximum switching limit).

For sensors with an analog output, the analog limit is taught that was specified in the SONPROG programming (setting as sup-plied: maximum analog value)

Compact ranges II and III

For the compact range II, the switching limits are taught; for the compact range III, the analog limits are taught.

Teach-in procedure• The LED flashes during teach-in.• During teach-in, evaluation is performed using the set mean

value.• If no object is detected in the sensing range, teach-in remains

active (LED flashes).• On successful completion of a teach-in, the potentiometer for

adjusting the switching range is disabled.

The teach-in procedure can be repeated as often as required.


Software update on the Internet: www.siemens.de/bero


20 mA

4 mAP1

20 cm 130 cm

NS

D0_

0119

3P2

Fallingcharacteristic

Initialvalue50 cm

Sensingrange

Risingcharacteristic

Finalvalue90 cm

Type 3RX4 000

Required hardware PC with VGA graphics card, serial interface COM1 or COM2

Required software MS-DOS Version 3.1 and higher Windows 3.X, Windows 95, 98 Windows NT

Operational voltage AC 100 ... 240 V, DC 24 V

Design Order No.

SONPROG interface device 3RX4 000

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/53

BERO Proximity SwitchesAccessories for Sonar BERO

Mounting sets

2


For plug-in connectors and extension cables see page 2/207.

Form Order No.

Aligning unit with mounting bracket

for Sonar BERO M30

Swivel range approx. 20° around longitudinal axis of BERO. Follow-ing assignment, the BERO is screwed tight in the selected position.

3RX1 301

Aligning unit with mounting flange

for Sonar BERO M30

Swivel range approx. 20° around longitudinal axis of BERO. Follow-ing assignment, the BERO is screwed tight in the selected position.

3RX1 302

Passive reflector

for Sonar BERO M30

3RX1 910

For dimensions, see page 2/213.

Mounting clamp (molded plastic)

• for Sonar BERO, M18 form 3SX6 283

• for Sonar BERO, M30 form 3SX6 284

Aligning unit

for 3SG16 67 Sonar BERO

3SX6 287

*

*

b

a

NSD01021

e

f

c

d

g

NS

D00

782

65

80 52

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/54


Summary of ranges

Opto BEROs

2

Overview

Functions Form Sensing range

50 m

m

120

mm

150

mm

50 c

m

60 c

m

1 m

1.2

m

2 m

2.5

m

4 m

6 m

12 m

15 m

50 m

70 m

Diffuse sensors D 4, M5 5 cm

M12 30 cm

M18 P 30 cm

K 20 50 cm

M18 S 60 cm

K 21, K 21 R 60 cm

K 31 60 cm

C40 70 cm

K 30 1.2 m

K 40 2 m

K 80 2 m


K 20 10 cm

M18 P 10 cm

M18 12 cm

K 31 15 cm

C 40 25 cm

K 80 1 m

Laser L 50 15 cm

Sensors with fiber-optic conductors

K 31 200 mm

KL 40 280 mm

K 30 400 mm

Diffuse sensor with analog output

Laser L 50 45 ... 85 mm

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/55

BERO Proximity SwitchesOpto BEROs

Summary of ranges

2

Operational voltage Output Connection Features Form Page

DC

UC

pnp

npn

Rel

ays

AS

-Int

erfa

ce

Ana

log

out

put

M 8

con

nect

or

M12

con

nect

or

Cab

le

Term

inal

s

AS

-Int

erfa

ce

with

FK

blo

ck

Tim

er fu

nctio

n

Ant

i-int

erfe

renc

e fu

nctio

n

Test

inp

ut

Mol

ded

pla

stic

Met

al e

nclo

sure

10 ... 30 V D 4, M5 2/67

10 ... 36 V M12 2/69

10 ... 30 V M18 P 2/74

10 ... 30 V K 20 2/77

10 ... 36 V M18 S 2/71

10 ... 30 V K 21, K 21 R 2/78

10 ... 36 V K 31 2/80

10 ... 30 V C40 2/86

10 ... 36 V K 30 2/82

10 ... 36 V K 40 2/84

10 ... 36 V 20 ... 320 V K 80 2/88

10 ... 30 V K 20 2/77

10 ... 30 V M18 P 2/74

10 ... 36 V M18 2/73

10 ... 36 V K 31 2/80

10 ... 30 V C 40 2/86

10 ... 36 V 20 ... 320 V K 80 2/88

10 ... 30 V L 50 2/97

10 ... 30 V K 31 2/80

10 ... 36 V KL 40 2/91

10 ... 36 V K 30 2/82

18 ... 28 V L 50 2/97

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/56


Summary of ranges

Opto BEROs

2

Functions Form Sensing range

50 m

m

120

mm

150

mm

50 c

m

60 c

m

1 m

1.2

m

2 m

2.5

m

4 m

6 m

12 m

15 m

25 m

50 m

Retroreflective sensor with

M12 1.5 m

M18 S 2 m

M18 P 2 m

K 31 2 m

K 21, K 21 R 3 m

K 30 4 m

K 40 6 m

C 40 6 m

K 80 6 m

Laser L 50 12 m

Light arrays 1.4 m

Thru-beam sensor

D 4, M5 25 cm

M12 4 m

M18 S 6 m

K 31 6 m

M18 P 12 m

K 30 12 m

K 40 15 m

K 80 50 m

Laser L 18 50 m

Color sensor CL 40 15 mm

Color mark sensor BERO

C 80 18 mm

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/57


Summary of ranges

2

Operational voltage Output Connection Features Form Page

DC

UC

pnp

npn

Rel

ays

AS

-Int

erfa

ce

M 8

con

nect

or

M12

con

nect

or

Cab

le

Term

inal

s

AS

-Int

erfa

ce

with

FK

blo

ck

Tim

er fu

nctio

n

Ant

i-int

erfe

renc

e fu

nctio

n

Test

inp

ut

Mol

ded

pla

stic

Met

al e

nclo

sure

10 ... 30 V M12 2/69

10 ... 36 V M18 S 2/71

10 ... 30 V M18 P 2/74

10 ... 36 V K 31 2/80

10 ... 30 V K 21, K 21 R 2/78

10 ... 36 V K 30 2/82

10 ... 36 V K 40 2/84

10 ... 30 V C 40 2/86

10 ... 36 V 20 ... 320 V K 80 2/88

10 ... 36 V L 50 2/97

12 ... 36 V Light arrays 2/98

10 ... 30 V D 4, M5 2/67

10 ... 36 V M12 2/69

10 ... 36 V M18 S 2/71

10 ... 36 V K 31 2/80

10 ... 30 V M18 P 2/74

10 ... 36 V K 30 2/82

10 ... 36 V K 40 2/84

10 ... 36 V 20 ... 320 V K 80 2/88

10 ... 30 V L 18 2/94

10 ... 30 V CL 40 2/92

10 ... 30 V C 80 2/93

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/58


Introduction

Opto BEROs

2

Overview

The Opto BERO photoelectric proximity switches react to changes in the received quantity of light. The light beam emitted from the emitter diode is interrupted or reflected by the object to be detected.

Depending on the type of BERO, the interruption or reflection of the light beam is evaluated. The following exist:• Diffuse sensor or type D• Retroreflective sensor or type R• Thru-beam sensor or type T.

The devices can be provided with background suppression as an option, or also as fiber-optic devices.

The comprehensive range of Opto BERO operates using infra-red, red or laser light and covers sensing ranges between 3 cm and 50 m. Due to the different physical principles of these sys-tems, thru-beam sensors have wider sensing ranges than ret-roreflective sensors. Diffuse sensors can also react to diffuse-re-flecting materials. Thus the sensing range is smaller than with retroreflective sensors.

The Opto BEROs can be set quickly and easily by means of a Teach-In or potentiometer. A large selection of cubic, cylindrical and miniature designs will satisfy every wish.

Area of application

The various versions of the Opto BEROs are preferably used in the following sectors:• In conveyor systems• In packaging machines• In mechanical engineering• In paper, textile and plastics processing• In printing machines• For access control.

These photoelectric sensors detect all objects regardless of their composition, whether metal, wood or plastic. Special ver-sions of the K 20 form in miniature enclosure and the C 40 are available for detecting transparent objects.

Special devices such as the color sensor or color mark reader can be used to detect differences in color or contrast. The ana-log laser supports extremely precise distance measurements and position monitoring.

Safety-related applications

The use of the sensors is not permissible for applica-tions in which the safety of persons is dependent on the function of the BERO.

Design

The devices can be mounted in any position. They should be in-stalled in such a manner as to prevent dirt deposits as far as possible. The available accessories enable the devices to be mounted easily and correctly.

Alignment

Diffuse sensors

The sensor must be aligned with the object to be sensed to en-sure reliable switching. In devices that have a surplus light func-tion, the relevant LED must be active.

Retroreflective sensors• Place the reflector at the required location and secure it firmly.• Cover the reflector with adhesive tape so that only the center

(approximately 25 % of the surface) remains free.• Install the retroreflective sensor so that it switches reliably.• Finally remove the adhesive tape from the reflector.

Thru-beam sensors• Place the receiver in the required position and secure it firmly.• Align the emitter with the receiver as accurately as possible.

Minimum clearance

The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. There-fore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sen-sors. The following distances are recommended values only. The values given are for maximum sensitivity.

Diffuse sensors


NSD00801

NSD00795

a

NSD00796

a

a

NSD00797

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/59


Introduction

2

Thru-beam sensor

1) Focusing at 50 m.

Setting the operating distance

The sensitivity is adjusted with the built-in multi-turn potentiome-ter. Turning it clockwise increases the sensitivity. The potentiom-eter cannot be overwound (no stops).

Diffuse sensors

The sensitivity and the distance should be set such that the ob-ject is reliably detected; if required, the surplus light LED should be activated. The object must then be removed. If the output re-mains On, the sensitivity must be reduced slightly.

Retroreflective sensors and thru-beam sensors

The potentiometer is normally set to maximum sensitivity (clock-wise rotation). This results in maximum surplus light. It may be necessary to reduce the sensitivity in the case of transparent ob-jects.

Cable length

Long cables between the devices result in:• Additional capacitive loading (short-circuit protection)• Increased injection of interference.

For this reason the specified maximum cable length must not be exceeded.

Functions

Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)

The light from the emitter falls on an object and is re-flected in a diffuse pattern. Part of this reflected light reaches the receiver located in the same device. If the intensity of the received light is sufficient, the out-

put is switched.

The sensing range depends on the size and color of the object involved as well as its surface texture. The sensing range can be varied within a wide range by means of the built-in potentiome-ter. The energetic sensor can therefore also be used to detect different colors.


Diffuse sensors with background suppression can detect objects up to a specific sensing range. All ob-jects beyond this range are suppressed. The focus level can be adjusted. The background is sup-

pressed due to the geometric constellation between the emitter and the receiver.

Retroreflective sensors

The light from the emitter diode is focused through a lens and directed with a polarization filter to a reflec-tor (principle of a 3-way mirror). Part of the reflected light passes through another polarization filter and

reaches the receiver. The filters are selected and aligned in such a way that only the light reflected from the reflector reaches the receiver and not the light reflected from other objects within the beam range.

An object that interrupts the light beam from the emitter through the reflector to the receiver causes the output to switch.

Light array (7-beam retroreflective sensor)

The light from all seven emitters of this special Opto BERO is di-rected to one reflector and reflected to the seven receivers of the BERO. The switching output switches as soon as one of the beams is interrupted. A line of 42 mm can be completely cov-ered. Typical applications are found, e.g. in conveyor systems.

Thru-beam sensors

Thru-beam sensors comprise an emitter and a re-ceiver. The emitter is aligned in such a way that the greatest possible amount of pulsed light from the emitter diode reaches the receiver. The receiver eval-

uates the incoming light to clearly separate it from the ambient light and other light sources.

Any interruption of the light beam between emitter and receiver causes the output to switch.

Opto BEROs Distance aD 4/M5M12M18K 31K 30K 40K 80L 18 (laser retroreflective sensor)L 50 (laser diffuse sensor)L 50 (laser retroreflective sensor)

50 mm250 mm250 mm250 mm500 mm750 mm500 mm150 mm 1)30 mm80 mm

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/60


Introduction

Opto BEROs

2

Devices for fiber-optic conductors

The basic operation is the same for optical fibers made of glass or plastic. Optical fibers are fitted in front of the emitter and receiver. They represent the "extended eye" of the Opto BERO.

As optical fibers are very small and flexible, they provide a prac-tical solution to the problem of sensing at points that are not eas-ily accessible. Furthermore no electrical potential is transferred.

Laser diffuse sensor with analog output

The analog laser BERO can measure the exact dis-tance of an object within its sensing range. Due to the use of visible laser light, the measurement is highly accurate and the output is extremely linear. All laser

BEROs belong to safety class 2, i.e. they are harmless and can be used without any risk to health (e.g. to the eyes).

Color sensors

The color sensor uses three LEDs with the colors red, green and blue. The light is emitted to the object.

When the BERO is set, the color of the object is mea-sured and assigned to an output state. During the

learning phase, the BERO saves the detected color in a non-vol-atile EEPROM. This ensures that the setting procedure will not have to be repeated whenever the supply for the BERO is switched on. One color or a color range can be set.


The color mark sensor uses green or red emitted light. The color is selected automatically depending on the contrast. The mark color and the background color can be set separately by means of two keys.


This table lists data which are independent of the design.

For further technical specifications, see the respective form.

Options

Cable length

The designs with cable are normally supplied with a cable of 2 or 3 m in length (see „Selection and ordering data“).

Longer cables can be ordered as necessary. In this case, the Order No. must be supplemented by "–Z" and the required length specified in plain text.

Type Solid-state output Relay output (K 80) Devices with laser (L 18, L 50)

Voltage drop at 200 mA V Max. 2.0 – Max. 2.4

Operating capacity mA Max. 200 2000 Max. 200

Reverse current of outputs mA Max. 0.1 – Max. 0.1

Power-up delay ms Max. 20 Max. 300 Max. 300

Differential travel (typical) for diffuse sensors

10% 10% 5%

Repeat accuracyfor diffuse sensors

5% of operating distance

Ambient light limit• Sunlight Lux 10,000• Halogen light Lux 3,000

Protective measures• Overload protection • – •• Overvoltage protection • – •• Short-circuit protection • Backup fuse required •

Max. cable length m Max. 250 Max. 250 Max. 100

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/61


Introduction

2

Circuit diagrams

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

M8 connector, Type A, C, D

Cable

M8 connector, Type A, C, D

Cable

Fig. 3 Fig. 4

M 8 connector, Type B

Cable

M 8 connector, Type B, 4-pole

Cable

Fig. 5 Fig. 6

M12 connector, Type F, K, L

Cable

M12 connector, Type F, K, L

Cable

Fig. 7 Fig. 8

M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L

Cable

M12 connector, Type G, M

Fig. 9 Fig. 10

M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, M

Cable

AS-Interface, FK block

Fig. 11 Fig. 12

Screw terminals Screw terminals

Fig. 13 Fig. 14

M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N

Cable


Cable

Fig. 15 Fig. 16



Fig. 17 Fig. 18



Fig. 19 Fig. 20



#

#2

#

34

34

34

5

.

&'('67&189&

#

#2

#

34

34

34

!.('

5

.

.

34

34

34

34

#

:;

#2

#

&'('89&

5

.

&'('67&

#

:;

#2

#

34

34

34

34

&'(''('67

&'('67&

5

.

*

#

:;

#2

#

34

34

34

34

5

.

&'('67&

&'('89&

#

:;

#2

#

34

34

34

34

&'(''('67

&'('67&189&

5

.

#

#2

#

34

34

34

!.('

5

.

#

:;

#2

#

<-

34

34

34

34

34

&'(''('67

&'('67&189&

5

!.('

.

#

#

34

34

5

.

NS

D00

877 (1)

(3)

AS-Interface

AS-Interface

34

34

34

34

34

5

)3=4

)++3=4

&3=4

.

#

:;

#2

#

<-

34

34

34

34

34

&'(''('67

&'('67&189&

5

!.('

.

*

#

#2

#

34

34

34

&'('67&189&

5

.

#

:;

#

34

34

34

&'('67&189&

5

.

NS

D00

880

BU (3)

BK (4)

2

3 4

1 WH (2)

BN (1)

0 V

Output light-ON

Output dark-ON

+Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

NS

D01

084

BU (3)

BK (4)

2 4

31

WH (2)BN (1)

Switching output light-ON/dark-ON

Programming

0 V

+Ub DC 10 ... 30 V

NS

D00

881a

BU (3)

BK (4)

2 4

31

WH (2)BN (1)

0 V

Switching output

Changeover light-ON/dark-ON+Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

#34

#234

:;34

#34

>('

>('?

5

. 5)

@

@

@

@

5

A76'('((

)7667&189&

. 5)

BK = Black BU = Blue YE = Yellow

BN = Brown GR = Gray WH = White

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/62


Introduction

Opto BEROs

2

Fig. 21 Fig. 22



Fig. 23 Fig. 24



Fig. 25 Fig. 26



Fig. 27 Fig. 28

Cable Cable

Fig. 29 Fig. 30

Cable Cable

Fig. 31 Fig. 32

Cable Cable

Fig. 33 Fig. 34

Cable Cable

Fig. 35 Fig. 36

Cable Cable

Fig. 37 Fig. 38

Cable M12 connector, Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N

Cable

Fig. 39 Fig. 40



BK = Black BU = Blue OR = Orange WH = White

BN = Brown GR = Gray RD = Red YE = Yellow

*

@

@>('

@5

@>('B

. 5)

NS

D00

880

BU (3)

BK (4)

2

3 4

1 WH (2)

BN (1)

0 V

Output light-ON

Output dark-ON

+Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

.

@

@6++6

@5

@A76'('

5)

@

@A76'('(

@5

@A76'('((

. 5)

*

@

@>+C'

@5

@A76'('

. 5)

@

@

@

@

5

A76'('(1((

"6'('

. 5)

#

:;

#2

#

>('

>('?

5

. 5)

NS

D00

704 BN

WH

BK

BU

RD

0 V

Changeover light:

Switching output pnp

+U b 10 ... 30 V DC

Ub

NS

D00

885 BN

WH

BK

BU

RD

+

Switching output npn

0 V

Changeover light-ON :

Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

Ub

NS

D00

887 BN

WHBKBURD

+

Switching output pnp0 VChangeover light: Alarm output

Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

Ub; dark: 0 V

NS

D00

888 BN

WHBKBURD

+Switching output npn

Alarm output

0 VChangeover light:

Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

Ub; dark: 0 V

*

#2

#

5")1)

NS

D00

890 WH

BN

RDBKBU

Switching output relay

15 ... 264 V AC/DC

NS

D00

891 BN

WH

BU

OR

+

Switching output

0 V

Programming

Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

NS

D00

892 BN

BKGRBU

RDWH

+Switching outputTime function0 V

Alarm outputProgramming

Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

NS

D00

893

BNWH

OR

BU

RD

GR

+Switching output npn/pnp

Control input B

0 V

Control input A

Analog output

Ub 10 ... 30 V DC

* #

:;

D!

<

B

5

.

786

*

#

:;

#2

#

A76'('3(463((4

63(4A76'('3((4

5

. 5)

%@

%@

%@

%@

5

A76'('

67&189&

6++6

.

%@

%@

%@

%@

%@

5

A76'('

67&189&

6++6

.

&'(''('67

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/63


Introduction

2

Characteristics

D 4 and M5 formsDiffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor

M12 formDiffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor

M18 form

Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

**

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/64


Introduction

Opto BEROs

2

K 30 and K 31 formsDiffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor

K 40 formDiffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor

K 80 formDiffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor Thru-beam sensor

*

*

3++4

3+4

2

2

3++4

3+4

*

2

2

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*

**

3+4

3+4

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*

3++4

3+4

*.

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/65


Introduction

2

Further information

Opto BERO lexicon

Terms associated with the technology of photoelectric proximity switches are explained below. Some of the terms are defined in IEC 60947-5-2.

Connection to AS-Interface

Assignment of data bits

Assignment of parameter bits

Anti-interference function

This function prevents mutual interference between Opto BEROs. The specified clearances between the devices does not have to be observed for devices with an anti-interference func-tion. It is therefore possible to align, e. g. two retroreflective sen-sors with a common reflector.

Function of the outputs

Dark-ON

The "Dark-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when no light reaches the receiver.

Light-ON

The "Light-ON" function means that this output is conducting (current-carrying) when light reaches the receiver.

Antivalent

The devices with antivalent output have 2 outputs. One output is Dark-ON, and the other is Light-ON.

Surplus light

As an alternative, some devices can be supplied with a different configuration of outputs, one output Light-ON and the other for signaling the surplus light.

Output current

The devices are designed for a maximum output current (rated operating current, see „Technical specifications“). If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload and short-circuit protection will be activated. Destruction of the device is effec-tively prevented.

Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have a similar effect to an overload.

A minimum load current (smallest operating current) is not re-quired. A built-in pull-up resistor ensures that an output signal is always available.

Autocollimation

With these devices, the optical axes of the emitter and receiver are identical. The device only has one optical axis. This means that there is no close range in front of the BERO and the accu-racy of the switching point is higher.

Spurious signal suppression

The devices feature spurious signal suppression. It prevents the occurrence of spurious signals from the moment of application of the operating voltage until the moment when the device is ready for operation (approximately 5 ms).

Sensing range

The sensing range is the range within which the operating dis-tance can be set. This term replaces any other previously used terms.

Correction factors

The specified sensing ranges of diffuse sensors are achieved with the specified surfaces by using matte-white standard pa-per. The following correction factors (approximate values) apply to other surfaces:

Enabling input

With Opto BEROs with a test input, the emitter can be switched on or off. Function monitoring can be implemented with appro-priate evaluation of the output signal (light barrier: no obstruction of light beam / diffuse sensors: reflecting object exists).

To disable the BERO, the enabling input must be connected to 0 V. For operation of the BERO, the enabling input does not have to be used.

Ambient light limit

Ambient light is the light produced by external light sources. The luminescence level is measured on the light incidence surface. Thanks to the use of modulated light, the devices are insensitive to ambient light.

There is, however, an upper limit for the intensity of any external light which is referred to as the ambient light limit. It is specified for sunlight (unmodulated light) and halogen light (light modu-lated at twice the frequency of the electricity supply). Reliable operation is not possible above the respective ambient light limit.

Data bits MeaningD0 Switching signalD1 Surplus lightD2 –D3 Test input

• 0 : emitter on• 1 : emitter out

Parameter bits Meaning

P0 –P1 Inversion of D0

• 0 : inverted• 1 : not inverted

P2 –P3 –

Test card 100 %White paper 80 %Light-colored wood 73 %White plastic 70 %Cork 65 %Printed newspaper 60 %Gray PVC 57 %Black plastic 22 %Black neoprene 20 %Automobile tires 15 %Sheet aluminum• Raw 200 %• Black anodized 150 %• Matte (brushed) 120 %Stainless steel, polished 230 %

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/66


Introduction

Opto BEROs

2

Surplus light

The surplus light is the excess radiant power that falls on the light incidence surface and that is evaluated by the light receiver. The surplus light can decrease in the course of time due to pollution, changing of the reflection factor of the object and aging of the emitter diode, so that reliable operation is no longer guaranteed.

All devices are therefore equipped with a surplus light LED. De-vices are also available in which this signal is connected to one of the outputs. This can be used to recognize states that are not operationally safe any longer.

Semiconductor lasers, laser diodes

These are characterized by an extremely high-den-sity beam and emit extremely tightly bundled light rays in visible red.

The lasers used correspond to protection class 2!

Differential travel

The differential travel causes a defined switching response for the devices. The ranges are always specified with regard to the pick-up point on approach.

IR light

IR is the abbreviation for "infrared". It refers to electromagnetic radiation with a wavelength between 780 and 1500 nnm which is longer than that of visible light (wavelength between 380 and 780 nm).

Fiber-optic conductors

Fiber-optic conductors consist of plastic or glass fibers in which the light can also be directed around bends. Fiber-optic conduc-tors support applications in which space is at a premium and un-der critical environmental conditions.

Light-emitting diodes, LEDs

In the Opto BEROs, LEDs are used as light beam sources. They have a narrow emission spectrum, can be easily modulated and have a long service life. In the Opto BEROs, they also serve to signal the switching status or the surplus light emission.

Parallel connection

Devices can be connected in parallel for logic gating of the out-puts. Different logic operations can be achieved by mixed use of Dark-ON and Light-ON outputs.

Attention:

The power consumption increases. Leakage cur-rents add up so that even in the off state, the load may be energized. Diodes in the output leads serve to decouple the pull-up resistors. They can be omit-ted when a small number of devices are connected in parallel.

Polarized light

Natural light (including the light from the emitter diodes or laser diodes) is unpolarized. When the light has passed through a po-larization filter, only that part of the light remains which oscillates in the polarization direction of the filter.

Retroreflective sensors use this polarized light to minimize the in-fluence of unwanted reflections. With polarization filters in front of the emitter and receiver, the retroreflective sensor only reacts to light that is reflected by a special reflector, the so-called 3-way mirror. Other reflections do not cause a reaction.

Modulated light

Opto BEROs operate with modulated light, i.e. the emitter is only active for a short time. Depending on the type, the modulation frequency fmod of the modulated light is between 5 and 30 kHz.

If an Opto BERO is operated in close proximity of another Opto BERO with the same modulation frequency, this may cause inter-ference (see „Minimum distance“).

Operation with modulated light offers the following advantages:• High degree of insensitivity to ambient light• Larger sensing ranges• Minimal temperature rise and therefore longer service life of the

emitter diodes.

NSD00801

Z X

NSD00800

Y

f

NSD00799

mod

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/67


D 4 form

2

Overview

Cylindrical metal enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector

Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)• Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable)

Thru-beam sensor• Sensing range 25 cm (not adjustable)

Rated operating voltage 24 V DC

Electronics output pnp or npn



Dimension drawings

Operating mode Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range cm 5 (not adjustable) 25 (not adjustable)Standard target mm 100 × 100 (white) –

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 10 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver)


Switching frequency Hz 250 250Switching time ms 2.5 2.5

Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 880 (IR)

Displays• Reliable detection Yellow LED• Surplus light fallen below Yellow LED flashing

Enclosure material D 4: stainless steel; M5: Brass, nickel-platedDegree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature °C 0 ... +55Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3

Type 3RG70 40–...00 3RG70 42–...00

Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No. Order No.

cm nm

Diffuse sensors 5 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2

pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG70 40–0AB00

npn, Light-ON 1 3RG70 40–0GB00

M8 plug, 3-pole, type A



Thru-beam sensor 25 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2



Emitter 2 3RG70 42–0BG00





3RG70 4.–0..00 3RG70 4.–7..00

35

NS

D00

802

4

26,5

LED

45

NS

D00

803

4

2826,5

LED

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/68


M5 form

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)• Sensing range 5 cm (not adjustable)

Thru-beam sensor• Sensing range 25 cm (not adjustable)





Dimension drawings

Operating mode Diffuse sensors Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range cm 5 (not adjustable) 25 (not adjustable)Standard target mm 100 × 100 (white) –

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 10 5 / 5 (emitter / receiver)


Switching frequency Hz 250 250Switching time ms 2.5 2.5


Displays• Reliable detection Yellow LED• Surplus light fallen below Yellow LED flashing

Enclosure material D 4: stainless steel; M5: Brass, nickel-platedDegree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature °C 0 ... +55Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3

Type 3RG70 30–...00 3RG70 32–...00


cm nm

Diffuse sensors 5 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2






Thru-beam sensor 25 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2








3RG70 3.–0..00 3RG70 3.–7..00

SW 7

35

NS

D00

804

M 5x0,5

3026,5

LED

SW 7

45

NS

D00

805

M 5x0,5

3026,5

LED

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/69


M12 form

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)• Sensing range 30 cm (adjustable using potentiometer)

Retroreflective sensor with• Sensing range 1.5 m• Supplied without reflector

Thru-beam sensor• Sensing range 4 m• Enabling input for test purposes




Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range cm 30 (adjustable) 150 400Standard target/reflector mm 200 × 200 (white) Reflector type D 84 –

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 15 15 15 / 15 (emitter / receiver)


Switching frequency Hz 1000 1000 1000Switching time ms 0.5 0.5 0.5

Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red)

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Surplus light Green LED

Enclosure material Brass, nickel-platedDegree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature °C –25 ... +55Temperature coefficient %/K 0.3

Type 3RG71 20–...00 3RG71 21–...00 3RG71 22–...00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/70


M12 form

Opto BEROs

2


Dimension drawings

Operating mode Sensing range Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No.

Order No.

cm nm

Diffuse sensors 30 (adjustable by potentiometer)

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2


pnp, Dark-ON 14 3RG71 20–0AA00


npn, Dark-ON 14 3RG71 20–0GA00

M12 plug, 4-pole, type F






150 660 (red, polarized)

2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2










Thru-beam sensor 400 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2












3RG71 20–0..00 3RG71 20–3..00 3RG71 21–0..00 and 3RG71 22–0..00

3RG71 21–3..00 und 3RG71 22–3..00

,

!

:

,

:

!

50

M 12x1

LED

SW

17

4

M 12x1

60 S

W 1

7

4

44

LED

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/71


M18 S form

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)• Sensing range 80 cm (adjustable using potentiometer)

Retroreflective sensor with• Sensing range 3 m• Supplied without reflector

Thru-beam sensor• Sensing range 6 m


Electronics output pnp




Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range cm 80 (adjustable) 300 600Standard target/reflector mm 200 × 200 (white) Reflector type D 84 –

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA


Switching frequency Hz 700Switching time ms 0.5

Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized) 660 (red)




Type 3RG76 40–...00, 3RG76 50–...00 3RG76 41–...00, 3RG76 51–...00 3RG76 42–...00, 3RG76 52–...00


Order No.

cm nm

Straight sensorDiffuse sensors 80

(adjustable by potentiometer)

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2



4 × 0.34 mm2 pnp, Light-ON and Dark-ON

5 3RG76 40–0CC00

pnp, Light-ON and sur-plus light function

6 3RG76 40–0CD00




pnp, Light-ON and Dark-ON

5 3RG76 40–3CC00


6 3RG76 40–3CD00



2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2



4 × 0.34 mm pnp, Light-ON and Dark-ON

5 3RG76 41–0CC00


6 3RG76 41–0CD00





5 3RG76 41–3CC00


6 3RG76 41–3CD00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/72


M18 S form

Opto BEROs

2

For dimension drawings, see M 18.


Order No.

cm nm

Straight sensorThru-beam sensor 600 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR,

3 × 0.34 mm2pnp, Light-ON 13 3RG76 42–0AB00



5 3RG76 42–0CC00


6 3RG76 42–0CD00

2 × 0.34 mm2 Emitter 9 3RG76 42–0BG00





5 3RG76 42–3CC00


6 3RG76 42–3CD00


Angled sensorDiffuse sensors 80

(adjustable by potentiometer)

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2




5 3RG76 50–0CC00


6 3RG76 50–0CD00





5 3RG76 50–3CC00


6 3RG76 50–3CD00



2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2




5 3RG76 51–0CC00


6 3RG76 51–0CD00





5 3RG76 51–3CC00


6 3RG76 51–3CD00

Thru-beam sensor 600 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2




5 3RG76 52–0CC00


6 3RG76 52–0CD00

2 × 0.34 mm2 Emitter 9 3RG76 52–0BG00





5 3RG76 52–3CC00


6 3RG76 52–3CD00


Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/73


M18 form

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor with background suppression• Sensing range 1 ... 12 cm (adjustable using potentiometer)





Dimension drawings

Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Sensing range cm 1 ... 12 (adjustable)Standard target mm 50 × 50 (white)

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 25


Switching frequency Hz 500Switching time ms 1

Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red)




Type 3RG76 54–...00


Order No.

cm nm

Diffuse sensor with background sup-pression

1 ... 12 (adjustable by potentiometer)

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.34 mm2










M18 form M18 S form3RG71 3.–0..00 3RG71 3.–3..00 3RG76 4.--...00 3RG76 5.-...00

,

:

!

*

,

:

!,

*

16,6

SW

24

4

NSD0_01299

LEDGN YE

min

. 34

M 18 × 1

M 12 × 116,3

Pot.

1327

,9

65

2

3

16,6

SW

24

4

NSD0_01288

LEDGN YE

min

. 34

M 18 × 1

M 12 × 116,3

Pot.

1327

,9

65

2

3

72,1

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/74


M18 P form

Opto BEROs

2

Overview

Cylindrical molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M12 connector

Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)• Sensing range 30 cm (adjustable using potentiometer)• Sensing range 10 cm (not adjustable)

Diffuse sensor with background suppression• Sensing range 2 ... 10 cm (not adjustable)• Special design with straight or angular optic system

Retroreflective sensor with• Sensing range 1.5 m (adjustable using potentiometer)• Sensing range 2 m (not adjustable)• Supplied without reflector

Thru-beam sensor• Sensing range 12 m (not adjustable)


Solid-state output pnp and npn, programmable as Light-ON or Dark-ON Exception with background suppression: Electronics output pnp or npn


Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Sensing range cm 30 (adjustable) 10 (not adjustable) 2 ... 10 (not adjustable)Standard target mm 100 × 100 (white) 100 × 100 (white) 100 × 100 (gray, 18 %)

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30No-load supply current I0, max. mA 30

Rated operating current Ie mA 150 100

Switching frequency Hz 500 200Switching time ms 1 2,5

Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red)

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED• Surplus light – Green LED

Enclosure material Molded plastic (ABS)Degree of protection IP67

Ambient temperature °C –15 ... +55Temperature coefficient %/K

Type 3RG76 20–...00 3RG76 20–...60 3RG76 24–...00, 3RG76 34–...00

Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

Retroreflective sensor without polarization filter

Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range cm 150 (adjustable) 200 (not adjustable) 1200 (not adjustable)Reflector mm Reflector type S 48 Reflector type S 48 –



Switching frequency Hz 500 250Switching time ms 1 2

Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR) 880 (IR)

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Surplus light –



Type 3RG76 21–...00 3RG76 21–...51 3RG76 22–...00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/75


M18 P form

2



cm nm


880 (IR) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.25 mm2

pnp/npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON

38 3RG76 20–1RH00



3RG76 20–3RH00

10 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.25 mm2


38 3RG76 20–1RH60



3RG76 20–3RH60

Retroreflective sensor with polar-ization filter

150 (adjustable by potentiometer)

660 (red) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.25 mm2


38 3RG76 21–1RH00



3RG76 21–3RH00


200 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.25 mm2


38 3RG76 21–1RH51



3RG76 21–3RH51

Thru-beam sensor 1200 880 (IR) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.25 mm2


38 3RG76 22–1RH00




3RG76 22–3RH00

Emitter 3RG76 22–3BG00

Diffuse sensor with background sup-pression, straight optics

2 ... 10 660 (red) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.25 mm2

Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible)

pnp 15 3RG76 24–1CC00

npn 15 3RG76 24–1HC00



pnp 15 3RG76 24–3CC00

npn 15 3RG76 24–3HC00

Diffuse sensor with background sup-pression, angled optics

2 ... 10 660 (red) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.25 mm2


pnp 15 3RG76 34–1CC00



pnp 15 3RG76 34–3CC00

npn 15 3RG76 34–3HC00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/76


M18 P form

Opto BEROs

2

Dimension drawings

3RG76 20–1..00 3RG76 20–3..00 3RG76 20–1..60, 3RG76 21–1..51, 3RG76 22–1..00

3RG76 20–3..60, 3RG76 21–3..51, 3RG76 22–3..00

3RG76 21–1..00 3RG76 21–3..00

3RG76 34–1..00 (angled optics)

3RG76 24–1..00 3RG76 24–3..00 (straight optics)

*

,

*

*

,

*

,

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/77


K 20 form

2

Overview

Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 connector

Diffuse sensor with background suppression• Sensing range 2 ... 10 cm (adjustable through teach-in)

Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects (adjustable with teach-in)• Sensing range 50 cm


Anti-interference function


Supplied without mounting material and without reflector



Dimension drawings

Operating mode Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects

Sensing range cm 2 ... 10 (adjustable) 50 (adjustable)Standard target/reflector mm 100 × 100 (gray 18 %) Reflector type R 60








Type 3RG74 04–...00 3RG74 01–...52


Order No.

cm nm


2 ... 10 (adjustable by "teach-in")

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2

Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 16 3RG74 04–0CH00

npn 16 3RG74 04–0HH00

M8 plug, 4-pole, type B


npn 16 3RG74 04–7HH00

Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects

50 (adjustable by "teach-in")

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


npn 16 3RG74 01–0HH52



npn 16 3RG74 01–7HH52

Accessories

Mounting bracket for K 20 3RX7 308

3RG74 0.–0.... 3RG74 0.–7....

,

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/78


K 21, K 21 R forms

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)• Sensing range 60 cm

Retroreflective sensor with• Sensing range 3 m



Supplied without mounting material and without reflector



K 21 thru-beam sensor with 6 m sensing range on request.

Operating mode Diffuse sensors Retroreflective sensor with

Sensing range cm 60 300Standard target/reflector mm 100 × 100 (white 90 %) Reflector type R 60

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 28 33 25 30




Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Operational voltage Red LED

Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP)Degree of protection IP68


Type 3RG74 00–...00 3RG74 20–...00 3RG74 01–...00 3RG74 21–...00


cm nm

K 21 formDiffuse sensors 60 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR,

3 × 0.14 mm2pnp, Light-ON 3RG74 00–0AB00

pnp, Dark-ON 3RG74 00–0AA00

npn, Light-ON 3RG74 00–0GB00

npn, Dark-ON 3RG74 00–0GA00


pnp, Light-ON 3RG74 00–7AB00





300 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2










Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/79


K 21, K 21 R forms

2

K 21 R thru-beam sensor with 6 m sensing range on request.

Dimension drawings


cm nm

K 21 R formDiffuse sensors 60 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR,

3 × 0.14 mm2pnp, Light-ON 3RG74 20–0AB00










300 660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2










Accessories


3RG74 0.–0.... 3RG74 0.–7....

3RG74 2.–0.... 3RG74 2.–7....

! "

! "

!"

! "

!"

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/80


K 31 form

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor• Sensing range 60 cm (adjustable using potentiometer)


Retroreflective sensor with• Sensing range 2 m (adjustable using potentiometer)• Supplied without reflector

Thru-beam sensor• Sensing range 6 m (adjustable using potentiometer)

Sensor for plastic optical fibers• Sensing range depending on type of optical fiber



Supplied without mounting material

Technical specification

Operating mode Diffuse sensors Diffuse sensor with background suppression

Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter

Sensing range cm 60 (adjustable) 3 ... 15 (adjustable) 200 (adjustable)Standard target/reflector mm 200 × 200 (white) 100 × 100 (white) Reflector type D 84

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 15 25 15


Switching frequency Hz 1000 500 1000Switching time ms 0.5 1 0.5

Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red) 660 (red, polarized)


Enclosure material Molded plastic (PBTP, Crastin)Degree of protection IP65


Type 3RG70 10–...00 3RG70 14–...00 3RG70 11–...00

Operating mode Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Sensing range cm 600 (adjustable) Depending on type of optical fiberStandard target mm – 100 × 100 (white)








Type 3RG70 12–...00 3RG70 13–...00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/81


K 31 form

2


Dimension drawings


cm nm


880 (IR) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2

pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG70 10–0AB00pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG70 10–0AA00npn, Light-ON 1 3RG70 10–0GB00npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG70 10–0GA00




3 ... 15 (adjustable by potentiometer)

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2






660 (red, polarized)

2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2




Thru-beam sensor 600 (adjustable by potentiometer)

880 (IR) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2






Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Depends on FO conductor

660 (red) 2 m cable, PUR, 3 × 0.14 mm2



pnp, Light-ON 1 3RG70 13–7AB00pnp, Dark-ON 1 3RG70 13–7AA00npn, light-ON 1 3RG70 13–7GB00npn, Dark-ON 1 3RG70 13–7GA00

Accessories

Mounting bracket for K 30, K 31 3RX7 910

3RG70 10–0..00, 3RG70 12–0..00, 3RG70 14–0..00

3RG70 11–0..00 3RG70 13–0..00

3RG70 10–7..00, 3RG70 12–7..00, 3RG70 14–7..00

3RG70 11–7..00 3RG70 13–7..00

"

0

*

0

0

0

0

0

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/82


K 30 form

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor• Sensing range 1.2 m (adjustable using potentiometer)









Sensing range cm 120 (adjustable) 400 (adjustable)Standard target/reflector mm 200 × 200 (white) Reflector type D 84

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 15 15



Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red, polarized)




Type 3RG70 10–...00 3RG70 11–...00

Operating mode Thru-beam sensor Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Sensing range cm 1200 (adjustable) Depending on type of optical fiberStandard target mm – 100 × 100 (white)








Type 3RG70 12–...00 3RG70 13–...00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/83


K 30 form

2


Dimension drawings


Order No.

cm nm


880 (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


pnp 3 3RG70 10–0CC00

npn 3 3RG70 10–0HC00

Light-ON and sur-plus light function

pnp 4 3RG70 10–0CD00

npn 4 3RG70 10–0HD00



pnp 3 3RG70 10–7CC00

npn 3 3RG70 10–7HC00


pnp 4 3RG70 10–7CD00

npn 4 3RG70 10–7HD00




3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


pnp 3 3RG70 11–0CC00

npn 3 3RG70 11–0HC00


pnp 4 3RG70 11–0CD00

npn 4 3RG70 11–0HD00



pnp 3 3RG70 11–7CC00

npn 3 3RG70 11–7HC00


pnp 4 3RG70 11–7CD00

npn 4 3RG70 11–7HD00


880 (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


pnp 3 3RG70 12–0CC00

npn 3 3RG70 12–0HC00


pnp 4 3RG70 12–0CD00

npn 4 3RG70 12–0HD00

3 × 0.14 mm2 Emitter 2 3RG70 12–0BE00



pnp 3 3RG70 12–7CC00

npn 3 3RG70 12–7HC00


pnp 4 3RG70 12–7CD00

npn 4 3RG70 12–7HD00

Emitter 2 3RG70 12–7BE00

Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Depends on FO conductor

660 (red) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


pnp 3 3RG70 13–0CC00

npn 3 3RG70 13–0HC00


pnp 4 3RG70 13–0CD00

npn 4 3RG70 13–0HD00



pnp 3 3RG70 13–7CC00

npn 3 3RG70 13–7HC00


pnp 4 3RG70 13–7CD00

npn 4 3RG70 13–7HD00

Accessories

Mounting bracket for K 30, K31 3RX7 910

3RG70 10–0..00, 3RG70 12–0..00 3RG70 11–0..00 3RG70 13–0..00

3RG70 10–7..00, 3RG70 12–7..00 3RG70 11–7..00 3RG70 13–7..00

"

0

*

0

0

0

0

0

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/84


K 40 form

Opto BEROs

2

Overview

Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using cable or M8 or M12 connector

Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor• Sensing range 2 m (adjustable using potentiometer)




Solid-state output pnpSolid-state output npn on request

Supplied with fixing accessories




Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range cm 200 (adjustable) 600 (adjustable) 1500 (adjustable)Standard target/reflector mm 400 × 400 (white) Reflector type D 84 –

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 36 (max. 20 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0 (typ.) mA 15 15 10 / 15 (emitter / receiver)



Wavelength (type of light) nm 880 (IR) 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR)




Type 3RG70 20–...00 3RG70 21–...00 3RG70 22–...00


Order No.

cm nm


880 (IR) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


pnp 3 3RG70 20–0CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 20–0CD00



pnp 3 3RG70 20–7CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 20–7CD00



pnp 3 3RG70 20–3CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 20–3CD00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/85


K 40 form

2

Dimension drawings


Order No.

cm nm




3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


pnp 3 3RG70 21–0CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 21–0CD00



pnp 3 3RG70 21–7CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 21–7CD00



pnp 3 3RG70 21–3CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 21–3CD00


660 (red) 3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.14 mm2


pnp 3 3RG70 22–0CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 22–0CD00

3 × 0.14 mm2 Emitter 3RG70 22–0BE00



pnp 3 3RG70 22–7CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 22–7CD00

Emitter 3RG70 22–7BE00



pnp 3 3RG70 22–3CC00


pnp 4 3RG70 22–3CD00

Emitter 3RG70 22–3BE00

Accessories


3RG70 20–0..00 3RG70 21–0..0

3RG70 22–0..00

3RG70 20–7..00 3RG70 21–7..00, 3RG70 22–7..00

*

*

0

*

*

*

0

*

*

0

*

*

0

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/86


C 40 form

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Diffuse sensor; energetic sensor• Sensing range 70 cm (adjustable by teach-in)

Diffuse sensor with background suppression• Sensing range 5 ... 25 cm (adjustable by teach-in)

Retroreflective sensor with• Sensing range 6 m (adjustable by teach-in)

Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects• Sensing range 1 m (adjustable by teach-in)



Supplied with mounting material and without reflector



Sensing range cm 70 (adjustable) 5 ... 25 (adjustable)Standard target mm 200 × 200 (white) 100 × 100 (gray)

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30No-load supply current I0, max. mA 35 25


Switching frequency Hz 1000 200Switching time ms 0.5 2,5





Type 3RG72 40–...00 3RG72 44–...00

Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Retroreflective sensor for transparent objects

Sensing range cm 600 (adjustable) 100 (adjustable)Reflector mm Reflector type D 84 Reflector type D 84

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30No-load supply current Imax.

mA 35



Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized)




Type 3RG72 41–...00 3RG72 41–...52

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/87


C 40 form

2


Dimension drawings


cm nm

Diffuse sensors 70 (adjustable by "teach-in")

660 (red) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

pnp, Light-ON or Dark-ON

39 3RG72 40–3CH00

npn, Light-ON or Dark-ON

39 3RG72 40–3HH00


5 ... 25 (adjustable by "teach-in")

660 (red) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F


40 3RG72 44–3CH00


40 3RG72 44–3HH00

Retroreflective sensor with polar-ization filter





39 3RG72 41–3CH00


39 3RG72 41–3HH00

Retroreflective sensor for trans-parent objects





40 3RG72 41–3CH52


40 3RG72 41–3HH52

3RG72 4.–3....

,

!

*

,

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/88


K 80 form

Opto BEROs

2

Overview

Cubic molded plastic enclosure, IP67, connection using M12 connector or Pg 11 cable gland

Diffuse sensor (energetic sensor)• Sensing range 2 m (adjustable using potentiometer)

Diffuse sensor with background suppression• Sensing range 0.2 ... 1 m (adjustable using potentiometer)



Rated operating voltage 24 V DC or 240 V AC/DC

Inputs and outputs• Electronics output pnp or npn

- Programmable as Light-ON or Dark-ON- Light-ON, Dark-ONDark-ON (compatible)

• Relay output 20 ... 320 V AC/DC• Timing function (delayed pick-up or drop-out, pulse shaping)• Enabling input for test purposes


Versions with AS-Interface• I/O configuration 1, ID code 1• Assembly on FK coupling module• Current consumption from AS-Interface max. 30 mA• Switching time max. 5 s



Sensing range m 2 (adjustable) 0,2 ... 1 (adjustable)Standard target mm 400 × 400 (white) 200 × 200 (white)

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 36 – 10 ... 36No-load supply current I0, max. mA 30 – 45

Operating voltage range (AC/DC) V – 20 ... 320 –No-load power, max. VA – 2 –

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 2000 (at AC 240 V) 200

Switching frequency, max. Hz 1000 20 250Switching time, max. ms 0.5 20 2





Type 3RG72 00–...00, 3RG72 10–...00

3RG72 10–6MC00 3RG72 04–...00, 3RG72 14–...00

Operating mode Retroreflective sensor with polarization filter Thru-beam sensor

Sensing range m 6 (adjustable) 50 (adjustable)Reflector mm Reflector type D 84 –

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 36 – 10 ... 36 –No-load supply current I0, max. mA 30 – 30 –

Operating voltage range (AC/DC) V – 20 ... 320 – 20 ... 320No-load power, max. VA – 2 – 2

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 2000 (at AC 240 V) 200 2000 (at AC 240 V)

Switching frequency, max. Hz 1000 20 1000 20Switching time, max. ms 0.5 20 0.5 20

Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized) 880 (IR)




Type 3RG72 01–...00, 3RG72 11–...00

3RG72 11–6MC00 3RG72 02–...00, 3RG72 12–...00

3RG72 12–6MC00, 3RG72 02–6FG00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/89


K 80 form

2



Order No.

m nm


880 (IR) M12 plug, 4-pole, type F


pnp 5 3RG72 00–3CC00

npn 5 3RG72 00–3HC00

M12 plug, 5-pole, type G, with enabling input

Light-ON or Dark-ON and surplus light, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s)

pnp 8 3RG72 10–3DK00

npn 8 3RG72 10–3EK00

Pg 11 Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible)

pnp 12 3RG72 00–6CC00

npn 12 3RG72 00–6HC00

Pg 11, with enabling input


pnp 12 3RG72 10–6DK00

npn 12 3RG72 10–6EK00

Pg 11 Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s)

– 11 3RG72 10–6MC00

FK coupling mod-ule

AS-Interface, with timing function (0.01 ... 1 s)

– 10 3RG72 10–5WS00


0,2 ... 1 (adjustable by potentiometer)



pnp 5 3RG72 04–3CC00

npn 5 3RG72 04–3HC00



pnp 8 3RG72 14–3DK00

npn 8 3RG72 14–3EK00


pnp 12 3RG72 04–6CC00

npn 12 3RG72 04–6HC00



pnp 12 3RG72 14–6DK00

npn 12 3RG72 14–6EK00

FK coupling mod-ule


– 10 3RG72 14–5WS00


6(adjustable by potentiometer)




pnp 5 3RG72 01–3CC00

npn 5 3RG72 01–3HC00



pnp 8 3RG72 11–3DK00

npn 8 3RG72 11–3EK00


pnp 12 3RG72 01–6CC00

npn 12 3RG72 01–6HC00



pnp 12 3RG72 11–6DK00

npn 12 3RG72 11–6EK00

Pg 11 Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s)

– 11 3RG72 11–6MC00

FK coupling mod-ule


– 10 3RG72 11–5WS00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/90


K 80 form

Opto BEROs

2

Dimension drawings


Order No.

m nm




pnp 5 3RG72 02–3CC00

npn 5 3RG72 02–3HC00


pnp 6 3RG72 12–3DK00

Emitter with enabling input

– 7 3RG72 02–3BG00


pnp 12 3RG72 02–6CC00

npn 12 3RG72 02–6HC00


pnp 12 3RG72 12–6DK00

npn 12 3RG72 12–6EK00


– 12 3RG72 02–6BG00

Relay, Light-ON and Dark-ON, with timing function (0.1 ... 10 s)

– 11 3RG72 12–6MC00


– 12 3RG72 02–6FG00

FK coupling mod-ule


– 10 3RG72 12–5WS00

Emitter – 10 3RG72 02–5WG00

Accessories


3RG72 ..–3..00 3RG72 ..–6..00

.

,

!

.

<

!

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/91


KL 40 form

2

Overview




Programmable using teach-in





Dimension drawings

Operating mode Sensor for plastic optical fibers

Sensing range mm Max. 280





Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Set Green/red LED



Type 3RG74 13–...00

Operating mode Light type Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No.

Order No.

nm

For plastic fiber-optic conductor

660 (red) 2 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.088 mm2


npn 34 3RG74 13–1HH00



npn 23 3RG74 13–7HH00

Accessories

Mounting bracket for KL 40 3RX7 313

3RG74 13–...00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/92


CL 40 form color sensors

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Color sensor with plastic optical fibers• Sensing range 3 ... 15 mm

Rated operating voltage DC 24 V


Sensors with cable connection, also with remote Teach-in and alarm output


Timer function




Dimension drawings

Operating mode Color sensor with plastic optical fibers

Sensing range mm 3 ... 15




Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red), 525 (green), 470 (blue)

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Programming Green/red LED



Type 3RG75 50–...00

Operating mode Sensing range Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No.

Order No.

mm

Color sensor with plastic optical fibers

3 ... 15 2 m cable, PVC, 6 × 0.088 mm2

Solid-state + alarm output

pnp 35 3RG75 50–1CA00

npn 35 3RG75 50–1HA00


Solid-state pnp 25 3RG75 50–7CA00

npn 25 3RG75 50–7HA00

Accessories

Mounting bracket for CL 40 3RX7 313

3RG75 50–...00

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/93


C 80 form – color mark sensors

2

Overview


Color sensor with plastic optical fibers• Sensing range 9 or 18 mm

Rated operating voltage DC 24 V



Timer function




Dimension drawings

Operating mode Color mark sensor

Sensing range mm 9 or 18 mm



Analog output (Ri = 22 kΩ) V 0 ... 5.5

Switching frequency Hz 10 000Switching time ms 0.05

Wavelength (type of light) nm 630 (red) or 526 (green); automatic selection

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Ready Green LED

Enclosure material Die-cast aluminumDegree of protection IP67


Type 3RG75 60–3CH5.

Operating mode Sensing range Connection Switching output Circ. diag. No.

Order No.

m


9 M12 plug, 4-pole, type F


18 Light-ON or Dark-ON pnp 26 3RG75 60–3CH54

3RG75 60–3CH5.

! " # "

! $ % &

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/94


L 18 form – laser

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 3 according to IEC 60825




Supplied with focusing and adjustment aid, without fixing materials



Operating mode Laser thru-beam sensor

Sensing range m 50 (adjustable)

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30No-load supply current I0, max. mA 15 (receiver), 10 (emitter)


Switching frequency Hz 6000Switching time ms < 0.083

Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red laser light, polarized)

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Surplus light Red LED• Operational voltage Green LED



Type 3RG71 35–...00, 3RG71 75–...00


m nm

Straight sensorLaser thru-beam sensor



3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.25 mm2

pnp, Light-ON, Dark-ON (compatible)

5 3RG71 35–0CC00

pnp, Light-ON and surplus light function

6 3RG71 35–0CD00




5 3RG71 35–3CC00


6 3RG71 35–3CD00


Angled sensorLaser thru-beam sensor



3 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.25 mm2


5 3RG71 75–0CC00


6 3RG71 75–0CD00




5 3RG71 75–3CC00


6 3RG71 75–3CD00


Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/95


L 18 form – laser

2

Dimension drawings

Straight sensor3RG71 35–0C.00 3RG71 35–0BE00 3RG71 35–3C.00 3RG71 35–3BE00

Angled sensor3RG71 75–0C.00 3RG71 75–0BE00 3RG71 75–3C.00 3RG71 75–3BE00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/96


L 50 form – laser

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


Visible laser light (red), laser protection class 3 according to IEC 60825


Diffuse sensor with analog output• Sensing range 4.5 ... 8.5 cm (adjustable using potentiometer)




Analog output



Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with background suppression Laser diffuse sensor

Sensing range cm 3 ... 15 (adjustable) 1200 (adjustable)Standard target/reflector mm 100 × 100 (white) Reflector type RL 50

Operating voltage range (DC) V 10 ... 30 (max. 10 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0, max. mA 50


Switching frequency Hz 2500Switching time ms < 0.2

Wavelength (type of light) nm 670 (red laser light)

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Surplus light Red LED• Operational voltage Green LED


Ambient temperature °C –20 ... +45Temperature drift %/K 0.1

Type 3RG70 56–...00 3RG70 57–...00

Operating mode Laser diffuse sensor with analog output

Sensing range mm 45 ... 85 (adjustable)

Resolution µm 80 20Linearity ms < 1 % of measuring range (40 mm)Measuring spot diameter (at distance of 65 mm)

mm < 0.8

Operating voltage range (DC) V 18 ... 28 (max. 10 % residual ripple)No-load supply current I0, max. mA 35

Analog output V 0 ... 10Output current, max. mA 3

Switching frequency Hz 500 50Switching time ms 1 10

Wavelength (type of light) nm

Displays• Surplus light Red LED• Operational voltage Green LED


Ambient temperature °C 0 ... +45Temperature coefficient µm/K 18

Type 3RG70 56–.CM00 3RG70 56–.CM03

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/97


L 50 form – laser

2


Dimension drawings

Characteristics

Operating mode Sensing range/resolution

Light type Connection Switching output/ analog output

Circ. diag. No.

Order No.

nm

Laser diffuse sen-sor with back-ground suppression

3 ... 15 cm(adjustable using potentiometer)

670 (red laser light)

2 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.25 mm2


pnp 5 3RG70 56–0CC00

npn 5 3RG70 56–0HC00


pnp 6 3RG70 56–0CD00

npn 6 3RG70 56–0HD00



pnp 5 3RG70 56–3CC00

npn 5 3RG70 56–3HC00


pnp 6 3RG70 56–3CD00

npn 6 3RG70 56–3HD00

Laser diffuse sen-sor

1.200 cm(adjustable using potentiometer)

670 (red laser light)

2 m cable, PUR, 4 × 0.25 mm2


pnp 5 3RG70 57–0CC00

npn 5 3RG70 57–0HC00


pnp 6 3RG70 57–0CD00

npn 6 3RG70 57–0HD00



pnp 5 3RG70 57–3CC00

npn 5 3RG70 57–3HC00


pnp 6 3RG70 57–3CD00

npn 6 3RG70 57–3HD00

Laser diffuse sen-sor with analog output

80 µm 6 m cable, PVC, 4 × 0.34 mm2,shielded

Analog 0 ... 10 V, rising signal

– 37 3RG70 56–1CM00

20 µm – 37 3RG70 56–1CM03

80 µm M12 plug, 4-pole, type F

Analog 0 ... 10 V, rising signal

– 37 3RG70 56–3CM00

20 µm – 37 3RG70 56–3CM03

Accessories

Mounting bracket for L 50 3RX7 302

Cable with connector, shielded, 4 × 0.34 mm2 3RX1 680

Cable with right-angle connector, shielded, 4 × 0.34 mm2 3RX1 681

3RG70 5.–0..00, 3RG70 56–1..0. 3RG70 5.–3..0.

3RG70 56–.CM0.

!"# "#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/98


Light arrays

Opto BEROs

2

Overview


7-beam retroreflective sensor• Sensing range 1.4 m


Autocollimation principle

Solid-state output pnp, switches on interruption in at least one light beam

Supplied with fixing accessories, without reflector



Dimension drawings

Operating mode Light arrays

Sensing range cm 140Reflector mm Reflector type R 45



Switching frequency Hz 50Switching time ms 10

Wavelength (type of light) nm 660 (red, polarized)

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Contamination monitoring Red LED



Type 3RG70 71–7CD27


cm nm

Light arrays 140 660 (red, polarized)


Dark-ON and surplus light function

6 3RG70 71–7CD27

3RG70 71–7CD27

$

! %!"& '(

)

*+

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/99

BERO Proximity SwitchesAccessories for Opto BEROs

Plastic optical fibers

2

Overview

The plastic fiber-optic conductors are used in conjunction with the Opto BEROs of K 30, K 31 and KL 40 forms.

The sensing range of the plastic fiber-optic conductors depends on the type of Opto BERO used.

The main advantages are:7 Extremely small dimensions7 Small bending radii7 For cutting to length7 Visible light7 Wide range of types7 Attractively priced.

Typical beam diagram (type 3RX7 003)



,-

.

.,-

.$"!"# "#

Attenuation at 660 nm, max. dB/m 0,4

Angle of incidence, max. ± 56°

Standard length m 2 ± 021

Bending radius, min. mm 25

Tensile load, max. N 30

Sleeve material Polyethylene

Degree of protection• Sensor head IP67• Sensor IP65

Temperature range °C –40 ... +75

Solvent resistance Not resistant

Version Sensing range for Opto BERO Order No.

Plastic fiber-optic conductors for diffuse sensors2 individual fibers Ø 1 mm, can be cut

Adapter sleeves for Ø 2.2 mm contained in the scope of supply.

3RX7 001

20 mm40 mm35 mm

K 31 formK 30 formKL 40 form

2 individual fibers Ø 2.2 mm, can be cut 3RX7 002

60 mm120 mm110 mm


2 individual fibers Ø 1 mm, can be cut

Adapter sleeves for Ø 2.2 mm contained in the scope of supply

3RX7 004

20 mm40 mm35 mm



60 mm120 mm100 mm


/

,$ -

/

,$ -

/

,$ -

/

/

,$ -

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/100


Plastic optical fibers

Accessories for Opto BEROs

2

Version Sensing range for Opto BERO Order No.

Plastic fiber-optic conductors for thru-beam sensors2 individual fibers Ø 2.2 mm, can be cut

(fine internal fibers)

3RX7 006

60 mm120 mm

90 mm



200 mm400 mm280 mm


2 individual fibers Ø 2.2 mm, can be cut

(fine internal fibers)

3RX7 008

60 mm120 mm

60 mm



200 mm400 mm280 mm


Front lensesFront lenses (1 pair)

for use with 3RX7 007 fiber type

3RX7 901

1,500 mm3,000 mm2,000 mm


Front lenses 90° (1 pair)

for use with 3RX7 007 fiber type

3RX7 902

250 mm500 mm350 mm


Cutting tool for fiber-optic conductorCutting tool for plastic fiber-optic conductors 3RX7 918

/

,$ -

/

,$-

,$ -

/

,$ -

/

/

,$-

/

,$ -

,$ -

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/101


Mounting brackets

2


Version Order No.

Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs with cylindrical M 18 enclosure

Material: Galvanized steel

3RX7 301

Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 20, K 21 forms

3RX7 308

Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 30, K 31 forms


3RX7 910

Mounting bracket for 35 mm rail forOpto BEROs of K 30, K 31 forms


3RX7 304

Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of KL 40, CL 40 forms

3RX7 313

00

0

0

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/102


Mounting brackets

Accessories for Opto BEROs

2

Version Order No.

Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 40, form (included in scope of supply)


3RX7 911

Mounting bracket for Opto BEROs of K 80 form


3RX7 303

Mounting bracket, adjustable, for Opto BEROs with cylindrical enclosure M 18, particularly for laser BEROs of L 18 form


3RX7 300

Mounting bracket for laser BEROs of L 50 form


3RX7 302

00

0

0

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

00

0

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/103


Reflectors

2


Version Standard for form Order No.

D 22

22 mm diameter

Range typically 40 %, referred to type D 84

3RX7 914

D 40

40 mm diameter


3RX7 915

D 84

84 mm diameter

M12, M18, K 30, K 31, K 40, C 40, K 80

3RX7 916

S 48

48 mm diameter


M18 P, K 50 3RX7 922–1A

R 70


3RX7 920–1A

R 45

Reflector 45 mm × 58 mm


Light arrays 3RX7 924

R 60


Range typically 40 to 50 %, referred to Type D 84

K 20, K 21 3RX7 305

R 84


high reflection factor for wide ranges

3RX7 306

RL 50

Reflector for laser light, 50 mm x 50 mm

L 50 3RX7 307

Reflecting foil 100 mm × 100 mm, Brange 50 ... 60 %, referred to type D 84

3RX7 917

1

1

1

1

1

1

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/104


Summary of ranges

Inductive BEROs

2

Overview

Operating distance

Cylindrical forms

3 m

m d

iam

eter

4 m

m d

iam

eter

M 5

6.5

mm

dia

met

er

6.5

mm

dia

met

er

M8

M8

8 m

m d

iam

eter

M12

M12

12 m

m d

iam

eter

12 m

m d

iam

eter

M18

M18

18 m

m d

iam

eter

18 m

m d

iam

eter

20 m

m d

iam

eter

M30

M30

Shielded/unshielded b b b b nb b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb b nb

Standard duty0.6 mm 2/122

0.8 mm 2/123 2/123

1 mm 2/124

1.5 mm 2/126 2/1272/128

2/127

2 mm 2/130

2,5 mm 2/136 2/136

4 mm 2/144

5 mm 2/151 2/152

8 mm 2/158

10 mm 2/165 2/1642/165

15 mm 2/171

20 mm

25 mm

30 mm

40 mm

Standard duty (PLC)1 mm 2/125

2 mm 2/131

2,5 mm

4 mm 2/146

5 mm 2/153

8 mm 2/159

10 mm 2/166

15 mm 2/173

20 mm

Extra duty ( 65 V DC or AC/DC)1 mm 2/125

2 mm 2/131

2,5 mm

4 mm 2/146

5 mm 2/153

8 mm 2/159

10 mm 2/165 2/166

15 mm 2/173

20 mm

30 mm

35 mm

40 mm

With analog output0 ... 6 mm 2/157

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/105

BERO Proximity SwitchesInductive BEROs

Summary of ranges

2

Cubic designs Operating distance

30 m

m d

iam

eter

30 m

m d

iam

eter

34 m

m d

iam

eter

5 m

m ×

5 m

m

8 m

m ×

8 m

m

Box

with

M 1

4

Box

with

M 1

4

12 m

m ×

32

mm

12 m

m ×

40

mm

12 m

m ×

40

mm

40 m

m ×

40

mm

40 m

m ×

40

mm

60 m

m ×

80

mm

60 m

m ×

80

mm

80 m

m ×

100

mm

80 m

m ×

100

mm

100

mm

× 1

00 m

m

b nb nb b b b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb Shielded/unshielded

Standard duty0.6 mm

2/123 0.8 mm

1 mm

2/127 1.5 mm

2/134 2/1342/135

2 mm

2,5 mm

2/145 4 mm

2/152 5 mm

8 mm

10 mm

2/172 15 mm

2/180 2/181 20 mm

2/187 25 mm

2/189 30 mm

2/193 40 mm

Standard duty (PLC)1 mm

2 mm

2/138 2,5 mm

4 mm

5 mm

8 mm

10 mm

2/174 15 mm

2/182 20 mm

Extra duty (65 V DC or AC/DC)1 mm

2 mm

2/138 2,5 mm

4 mm

2/152 5 mm

8 mm

10 mm

2/1742/175

15 mm

2/180 2/184 2/182 20 mm

2/189 30 mm

2/191 35 mm

2/194 2/193 40 mm

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/106


Summary of ranges

Inductive BEROs

2

Operating distance

Cylindrical forms

3 m

m d

iam

eter

4 m

m d

iam

eter

M 5

6.5

mm

dia

met

er

6.5

mm

dia

met

er

M8

M8

8 m

m d

iam

eter

M12

M12

12 m

m d

iam

eter

12 m

m d

iam

eter

M18

M18

18 m

m d

iam

eter

18 m

m d

iam

eter

20 m

m d

iam

eter

M30

M30

Shielded/unshielded b b b b nb b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb b nbExtreme ambient conditions (IP68)0.6 mm 2/122 2/122

1 mm

2 mm 2/132 2/132

2.5 mm 2/139 2/139

4 mm 2/1472/148

2/147

5 mm 2/154 2/154

8 mm 2/1602/161

2/160

10 mm 2/167

15 mm 2/176

Greater rated operating distance2 mm 2/133

2.5 mm 2/139 2/139

3 mm 2/140 2/140

4 mm 2/149

6 mm 2/156 2/156

8 mm 2/162

10 mm 2/169

12 mm 2/169

15 mm 2/175

20 mm 2/180

22 mm 2/186

25 mm

30 mm

35 mm

40 mm 2/195

50 mm

65 mm

U BERO without reduction factor1.5 mm 2/129

3 mm 2/142

4 mm 2/150

5 mm 2/155

8 mm 2/163

10 mm 2/168

12 mm 2/170

15 mm

20 mm 2/185

25 mm

35 mm

40 mm

75 mm

Pressure-resistant up to 500 bar (IP68)3 mm 2/143

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/107


Summary of ranges

2

Cubic forms Operating distance

30 m

m d

iam

eter

30 m

m d

iam

eter

34 m

m d

iam

eter

5 m

m ×

5 m

m

8 m

m ×

8 m

m

Box

with

M 1

4

Box

with

M 1

4

12 m

m ×

32

mm

12 m

m ×

40

mm

12 m

m ×

40

mm

40 m

m ×

40

mm

40 m

m ×

40

mm

60 m

m ×

80

mm

60 m

m ×

80

mm

80 m

m ×

100

mm

80 m

m ×

100

mm

100

mm

× 1

00 m

m

b nb nb b b b nb b b nb b nb b nb b nb nb Shielded/unshielded

Extreme ambient conditions (IP68 / IP69 K)0.6 mm

1 mm

2 mm

2.5 mm

4 mm

5 mm

8 mm

2/167 10 mm

2/176 2/178 15 mm

Greater rated operating distance2 mm

2.5 mm

2/141 3 mm

4 mm

6 mm

8 mm

10 mm

12 mm

15 mm

2/1832/184

20 mm

22 mm

2/187 25 mm

2/190 30 mm

2/191 35 mm

2/1962/197

40 mm

2/198 50 mm

2/198 65 mm

U BEROs without reduction factor1.5 mm

3 mm

4 mm

5 mm

8 mm

10 mm

12 mm

2/179 15 mm

20 mm

2/188 25 mm

2/192 35 mm

2/192 40 mm

2/199 75 mm

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/108


Introduction

Inductive BEROs

2

Overview

The inductive BEROs are position switches that can be operated without contact, that contain no mechanical parts subject to wear, and that are to a large extent insensitive to environmental conditions.

They are used in applications with stringent requirements for re-liability, switch point accuracy, service life, number of switching operations, operating speed, and so on.

Area of application

Inductive BEROs are the low-cost method for non-contact detec-tion of metal objects. They are used in sectors in which metal components play an important role, e.g.7 In the motor industry7 In mechanical engineering7 In the robotics industry7 In conveyor systems and7 In the paper and printing industry

The induction principle and the experience gained by Siemens over many years have made the inductive BEROs what they are: extremely reliable with a very high repeat accuracy and long ser-vice life thanks to a lack of wearing parts as well as their insen-sitivity to temperature, noise, light and water.

Our customers also benefit from the wide range of inductive BERO proximity switches that Siemens offers. Our complete range meets a wide range of different requirements and leaves no wishes unfulfilled. Inductive BEROs are available7 With operating distances from 0.6 to 75 mm7 In cylindrical and cubic designs7 In the standard version as 3- and 4-wire sensors7 As 2-wire sensors for solid-state inputs7 For extra duty ( 65 V DC or 320 V AC/DC)7 To the IP68 degree of protection for extreme environmental

conditions7 With increased operating distances7 Without a reduction factor7 As pressure-resistant sensors7 According to DESINA specification7 For direct connection to AS-Interface and7 As intrinsically safe sensors for potentially explosive environ-

ments.

Application examples

Recognition of broken drills

Recognition of positioning screws on the wheel for velocity or direction control

Recognition of the valve position (completely open or closed)

Recognition of broken pieces on a mill

Recognition of cans and lids

The inductive BERO proximity switches are classified in accor-dance with their applications or their technical characteristics:

BEROs for standard duty• Rated operating voltage: 15 to 34 V DC

(with 3RG46: 10 to 30 V DC)

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/109


Introduction

2

• Output- 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC,

up to 200 mA- 4-wire BERO: 1 NO and 1 NC (antivalent),

pnp up to 200 mA• Operating distance acc. to standard• The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated op-

erating distance.

BEROs for PLCs (2-wire)• Rated operating voltage: 15 to 34 V DC• Output 2-wire BERO: 1 NO, up to 25 mA• Residual current and voltage drop to suit solid-state inputs• Operating distance acc. to standard• The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated

operating distance.

Advantages:7 Minimum wiring overheads7 Direct replacement of mechanical position switches possible

in installations that are not safety-oriented7 Power is supplied from the solid-state input7 npn as well as pnp switching.

BEROs for extra duty• Rated operating voltage:

- 3-wire BERO: 10 to 65 V DC- 2-wire BERO: 20 to 320 V AC/DC

• Output- 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp,

up to 300 mA- 2-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC,

resistive load up to 300 mA• The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated

operating distance.

Advantages:7 Problem-free adaptation to different rated operating voltages7 Insensitive to voltage deviations

BEROs for extreme environmental conditions (IP69 K)• Rated operating voltage:

- 2-wire BERO: AC/DC 20 to 320 V- 3-wire BERO: 15 to 34 V DC, 10 to 65 V DC,- 4-wire BERO: DC 15 to 34 V

• Output- 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp up to 300 mA- 4-wire BERO: NO and 1NC (antivalent),pnp up to 200mA

• The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated operating distance.

Advantage7 Can be used under extreme environmental conditions accord-

ing to IP68 by use of a well-sealed enclosure with a special casting compound.

BEROs with greater operating distance• Rated operating voltage: DC 10 to 65 V

(with 3RG46: 10 to 30 V DC)• Output 3-wire BERO: 1 NO or 1 NC, pnp up to 300 mA• Operating distance far above the standard, up to three times

the rated operating distance defined in the standard• The actuation distance is between 0 and 81 % of the rated op-

erating distance.

Advantages:7 Wide range of mounting adjustment7 A smaller type can be selected for the required operating dis-

tance7 Reduction of actuation distance is corrected for non-ferrous

metals

U BEROs without reduction factor• Rated operating voltage: 3-wire BERO: 10 to 30 V DC• Output 3-wire BERO: 1 NO, pnp up to 200 mA

Advantages:7 No reduction factor for non-ferrous metals7 Resistant to magnetic fields, i.e. these BEROs are resistant to

welding. Magnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s. = 21 kA at 25.4 mm;except 3RG46 48: 140 mT r.m.s. except 3RG46 44: 140 mT r.m.s. except 3RG46 43: 75 mT r.m.s.

BEROs pressure-resistant up to 500 bar (7250 psi)• Rated operating voltage: 10 to 30 V DC• Output 3-wire BERO: 1 NO, pnp up to 200mA• Operating distance: 3 mm.

Advantages:7 Suitable for extreme dynamic mechanical stress7 Easy to install: BERO can be screw fastened against a stop,

no adjustment required7 Sensing face seal is gas-tight

BEROs with analog output• Rated operating voltage: 10 to 30 V DC• Output

- Voltage output 0 to 5 V DC- Current output 1 to 5mA,

• Short-circuit protection, inductive interference protection, total reverse polarity protec-tion

• Non-linearized design• Connection through cable or S12 connector

Approvals

3RG40, 3RG41 devices with M 12 or M 18 connectors as well as terminal compartments are UL and CSA listed.

For a complete overview, see under „Appendix“.

Explosion protection

Approvals for Ex zones 2 and/or 22 according to ATEX on re-quest.

Personal safety

The use of the inductive BEROs is not permissible for applications in which the safety of persons is de-pendent on the function of the BERO.

NSD00801

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/110


Introduction

Inductive BEROs

2

Design

Specifications

IEC 60947-5-2, EN 60947-5-2 (VDE 0660, Part 208)

Minimum clearance

The proximity switches must not interfere with each other. There-fore a minimum distance a must be observed between two sen-sors.

The distance a depends on the sensor size and type (see the diagrams in selection tables).

Degree of protection

Degree of protection according to IEC 60 529.


Where:

6 Protection against the entry of dust. Complete contact protec-tion (electric).

7 Protection against water when the enclosure is immersed in water under given pressure and time conditions. Entry of water in harmful amounts is not allowed.

Test conditions:• Immersion depth 1 m• Time 30 min


Where:

6 As above.

8 Protection against water when submersed.

The leak test is based on IEC 60068-2-17, test ql. Contrary to the standard, the tested device is stored in steam and not in water since greater stress exists with this type of storage.

Parameters:• 7.4 Initial conditions: operating distance at Tamb = 25 °C ± 5 °C• 7.5.1 Test liquid: tap water• 7.5.2 Temperature of test liquid: 105 °C – 5 °C,• 7.5.4 Test pressure: 12 N/cm (1.2 bar)• 7.5.5 Stress duration: 5 days• 7.6 Post-treatment: drying at room temperature and cooling.

The final measurement is made as soon as the device under test has reached room temperature.

• 7.7 Final measurement: operating distance at Tamb = 25 °C ± 5 °C. The permissible change is ± 10% of the initial state.

Degree of protection IP69 K

Where:

6 As above.

9 K Protection against water with high-pressure jet cleaning. (i.e.: water directed at extremely high pressure onto the enclo-sure from all directions must not result in harmful effects.)

Connectors

For the cylindrical types, 8 mm combined plugs or plugs with M12 threads are offered as standard (3-pole or 4-pole). A cable plug is additionally required for the plug-and-socket connec-tions, see under „Accessories“.

As an option, plugs with an M18 thread (3-pole) are also offered for the M18 and M30 types.

Cables

In general, highly flexible cables with oil-resistant outer sheaths of polyurethane (PUR) are used that are 2 m long as standard.

For applications where cables come into contact with acids or alkalis, please order devices with PVC cables.

For devices used in applications to UL and CSA, PVC cables must be ordered.

See „Options for other cable lengths and materials“.

Cable length

For the BERO proximity switches, long cables cause:• Capacitive loading of the output• Increased injection of interference.

Cables should be shorter than 300 m even under favorable con-ditions.

Cable routing

The connecting leads of the proximity switches should not be routed in a cable channel alongside cables that are used to switch inductive loads (e.g. contactor coils, solenoid valves, mo-tors) or that carry the current for solid-state motor drives.

The cable lengths should be kept as short as possible; with fa-vorable routing (small coupling capacitance, small interference voltages), the length may be up to 300 m.

Interference can be reduced by means of the following mea-sures:• Clearance from interfering cables > 100 mm,• Shielding• Connection of coils (of contactors, relays or solenoid valves)

with RC elements or varistors.

NSD00796

a

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/111


Introduction

2

Functions

A high-frequency alternating field is generated in the BERO and emerges at the "sensing face". The physical size of this alternat-ing field determines the "range" of the device. When a material that is a good conductor of electricity and/or magnetism comes into close proximity with the sensing surface, the field is damped. Both states (field damped or undamped) are evalu-ated in the BERO and result in a change in the output state of the switch.

Built-in protection

The protective circuits built into most BEROs (see „Selection and ordering data“) make them easy to handle and protect the de-vices from damage.

Protection is possible against7 Spurious signals7 Short-circuit and overload (DC)7 Swapped connectors7 Wire-break (connection L– or L+),7 Overvoltage peaks7 Radio interference

Spurious signal suppression

When the operating voltage is applied, the "damped" status is simulated due to the transient condition of the sensor inductor – even when an activation element is not present. Spurious signal suppression prevents the output switching during this period.

Short-circuit and overload protection

All DC voltage devices with three-wire and four-wire connections are equipped with short-circuit and overload protection. Short-circuits between the output and the operating voltage connec-tions do not damage the proximity switches, and may be occur permanently; an unlimited overload is also permissible. For the duration of the short circuit, the LEDs are not functional.

Polarity reversal protection

All DC voltage devices with three-wire and four-wire connections are protected against reverse polarity at all connections.

Wire-break protection

The DC version is designed such that when a wire-break occurs in any connection, the BERO does not output a faulty signal (not for 3RG46 and all 4-wire BEROs). A faulty signal is any non-zero signal that is active for more than 2 ms and whose current is larger than the residual current.

Inductive interference protection

When inductive loads are disconnected, the output voltage rises (without protective elements) to high values whereby the output transistor can be destroyed. The BERO proximity switches are therefore equipped with a Zener diode at the output which limits the disconnection voltage to a safe value (3-wire BERO).

When inductive loads are connected at currents > 100 mA and simultaneously a switching frequency > 10 Hz, it is recom-mended that a freewheeling diode is directly connected across the load (due to the power losses in the built-in Zener diode).

Protection against radio interference

The high-frequency susceptibility has been sufficiently reduced to comply with IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 (testing level 10 V/m).

Protection against electrostatic charging

The devices are constructed such that electrostatic charging to IEC 61000-4-3, Level 3 (8 kV) does not damage the devices.

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

All inductive BEROs meet the protection requirements of EMC guideline No. 89/336/ECC. This is verified by application of the standard EN 60947-5-2 and certified by the appropriate author-ity.

The following EMC standards are applicable for the individual tests:• EN 55 011, IEC-CISPR 11,• EN 55 022, IEC-CISPR 22,• IEC 61 000-4-2, Level 3,• IEC 61 000-4-3, Level 3,• IEC 61 000-4-4, Level 3,• IEC 61 000-4-6,• IEC 60 255-5.

Displays (LEDs)

Most BEROs are equipped with one or two LEDs.

The yellow LED indicates the operating status:• BERO with NO function:

BERO damped = LED lit• BERO with NC function:

BERO not damped = LED lit• BERO with NO and NC function:

BERO damped = LED lit.

The green LED indicates that the operating voltage is applied. This function is only available in certain devices.

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/112


Introduction

Inductive BEROs

2


General technical specifications

1) Up to +70 °C with 3RG41 and 3RG46.2) Maximum switching current for three-wire BEROs for standard duty

at operating temperatures >50 °C is 150 mA.

Fastening nuts

Options

Longer connection lines

The 3RG4 inductive BEROs are available with longer connection lines (PUR).

Delivery possibilities on request.

Stainless steel enclosure

Many 3RG4 cylindrical inductive BEROs (from M 12 upwards) with brass enclosure are also available in stainless steel.


Extended temperature range

The 3RG40 BEROs are available for an operating temperature of –40 to +85 °C or –25 to +100 °C.


Special cables

The 3RG40 and 3RG41 inductive BEROs (3RG46 on request) are also available with other types of cable; see table below.

The Order No. must be supplemented by "–Z", and the required type of cable and length specified in plain text.


Differential travel H H ≤ 0.2 sr

Max. permissible lead length(unshielded)

• AC 100 m

• DC 300 m

Degree of protection

• With buried cable IP67

• With connector and cable plug IP67

• With terminal compartment IP65

• BERO for extreme environment IP68 or IP69 K

• U BERO without reduction factor- With brass enclosure IP67- With stainless steel enclosure IP68

Ambient temperature

• During operation –25 ... +85 °C 1) 2)

• During storage –40 ... +85 °C 1)

Shock resistance 30 × g, 18 ms duration

Resistance to vibration 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude

Reduction factor

• BERO for flush/non-flush mounting (typical values)- Stainless steel 0.7 ... 0.9- Aluminum 0.35 ... 0.5- Copper 0.2 ... 0.4- Brass 0.3 ... 0.6

• U BERO 1

Voltage drop

• 2-wire BERO ≤ 8 V

• 3-wire BERO ≤ 2.5 V

• 4-wire BERO ≤ 2.5 V

Form Material Tightening torque

nm

M8 Brass 2

Stainless steel 5

M12 Brass 10

Molded plastic 1

Stainless steel 25

M14 Molded plastic 0.5

M18 Brass 20

Molded plastic 3

Stainless steel 50

M30 Brass 40

Molded plastic 5

Stainless steel 100

BERO Type of conductor Outer diameter Permissible con-ductor cross-sec-tion

mm mm2

2-wire LiYY11Y (PUR) 4.5 2 × 0.25

PVC 4.5 2 × 0.56

3-wire LiYY11Y (PUR) 4.5 3 × 0.25

PVC 4.8 3 × 0.56

PVC (oil-resistant) 4.6 3 × 0.25

Teflon 4.0 3 × 0.55

Silicone 5.5 3 × 0.25

4-wire LiYY11Y (PUR) 4.5 4 × 0.14

PVC 5.3 4 × 0.34

PVC (oil-resistant) 4.6 4 × 0.14

Teflon 4.3 4 × 0.55

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/113


Introduction

2

Circuit diagrams

Fig. 1 Fig. 11 Fig. 21









Fig. 10 Fig. 20 Fig. 30

Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60 757:

BK = black BN = brownBU = blue WH = white

1

243

L+

L

NSD00642

NO+NC

2

3

34

35

1

2/4

3

L+

LNO

NSD00662

1

4

3

L+

LNO

NSD00643

NCNSD00653

BN

BK

BU

L+

L

1

4

L+

LNO

NSD00663

1

2

3

L+

LNC

NSD00644

NONSD00654

BN

BK

BU

L+

L

1

2/4

3

L+

LNC NO

NSD00664

1

4

3

L+

LNO

NSD00645

NCNSD00655

BN

BK

BU

L+

L

1/3

2/4

L1/L+

NC NONSD00665

(N/L )

N/L

(L1/L+)

1

2

3

L+

LNC

NSD00646

NONSD00656

BN

BU

L+

L

3

42

1 L+

L

NO+NCNSD00666

1

4

L+

LNO

NSD00647

NONSD00657

BK

BK

L1/L+

N/L

(N/L )

(L1/L+)

1/3

X

2/4

L+

L

NSD00667

NO

1

4

3

L+

L

NONSD00648

NCNSD00658

BK

BK

L1/L+

N/L

(N/L )

(L1/L+)

1/3

X

2/4

L+

L

NSD00668

NC NO

3

4

L1/L+

NONSD00649

N/L

N/LL1/L+

1

42

3

L+

LNO+NC

NSD00659

2

1

2NC

NSD00650

L1/L+N/L

L1/L+N/L

1

2/4

3

L+

LNO

NSD00660

2

L

L+

NSD00651

NO+NC

WH

BN

BK

BU

1

2/4

3

L+

LNC

NSD00661

+UB

R L2

A1

A2

0 V

=

39 V

39 V

BN

BK

WH

BUR L1

NSD00669

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/114


Introduction

Inductive BEROs

2

Typical circuits

Ub= Operational voltage Uc= Minimum operating voltage of the load n= Number of BEROs Umin = Minimum permissible operational voltage1) The power-up delay of the sensors must be considered when deter-

mining the switching times.

Abbreviations for color identification of the connection cables according to IEC 60 757:BK = black BN = brownBU = blue WH = white

Parallel connection Series connection 1) Parallel circuit with 1 contact (NO or NC)

Series circuit with 1 contact (NO or NC) 1)

DC voltage version2-wire BEROs, for PLCs

Not possible since the total of all BERO off-state currents must be smaller than the holding current of the load

Not possible since

n ≤

Ub PLC: 24 V

3-wire BEROs, pnp

n ≤ + 1

Uc = Ub – (n · 2.5 V)

Other connections are not permissible.

3-wire BEROs, npn

n ≤ + 1

Uc = Ub – (n · 2.5 V)

4-wire BEROs, pnp

AC/DC version

The total of all BERO off-state cur-rents must be smaller than the hold-ing current of the load

n ≤

Uc = Ub – (n · 8 V)

With DC voltage operation, a diode must be connected in parallel to the primarily inductive load.

Ub 15 V–

8 V-------------------

NSD00671

BN

BU L

L

NSD00670

BN

BU L

L

NSD00672

BN

BK

BU

L L

BN

BK

BU

NSD00673

BN

BK

BU

L

L

BN

BK

BU

Ub Umin–

2.5 V--------------------

NSD00675

L

BN

BK

BU

L

NSD00674

L

BN

BK

BU

L

NSD00676

BU

BK

BN

L L

BU

BK

BN

NSD00677

BU

BK

BN

L

L

BU

BK

BN

Ub Umin–

2.5 V--------------------

NSD00679

L

BU

BK

BN

L

NSD00678

L

BU

BK

BN

L

334

35

334635

6

334

35

334635

6

334635

334635

NSD00680

BK

BK

BK

BK N(L )

L1(L )

NSD00681

BK

BK

BK

BK N(L )

L1(L )

Ub

20 V---------

NSD00683

BK

BK

L1(L )

N(L )

NSD00682

BK

BK N(L )

L1(L )

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/115


Introduction

2

Characteristics

Response curves

The response curves are determined using standard targets ac-cording to EN 60947-5-2.

Operating distance 0.6 mm (normal)

3RG46 03, 3RG46 00, 3RG4610

Operating distance 0.8 mm (nor-mal) 3RG 46 .0, 3RG 46 36

Operating distance 1 mm (normal)

3RG40 11

Operating distance 1.5 mm (nor-mal) 3RG40 ..–...33 (shorty)

Operating distance 1.5 mm (normal)

3RG40 ..–...05, 3RG46 01, 3RG46 11, 3RG46 37

Operating distance 1.5 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 11

Oper. distance 2 mm (normal)

3RG40 12, 3RG40 52, 3RG40 7.

Operating distance 2 mm (extra duty) 3RG41 11

Oper. distance 2.5 mm (normal)

3RG40 21, 3RG40 60

Oper. distance 2.5 mm (normal)

3RG40 72

Operating distance 2.5 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 02, 3RG46 11


Operating distance 3 mm (extra duty) 3RG46 02, 3RG46 37

Operating distance 3 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 12

Oper. distance 3 mm (pressure-tight) 3RG46 52


3RG40 22, 3RG40 62



7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

/

7

/

7 7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

ymm

mm mm24 0 4

NS

D0_

0113

6a

-x +x2

1

0,5

2,5

2

1,5

7

/

/

7

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

ymm

-xmm

1

2

4 2 0 42

NS

D0_

0042

6

4

+xmmmm

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/116


Introduction

Inductive BEROs

2


3RG40 13, 3RG40 53


3RG40 82



Operating distance 0 ... 6 mm (ana-log) 3RG46 12


3RG40 23, 3RG40 63




3RG40 14, 3RG40 54, 3RG46 25





Operating distance 15 mm (nor-mal) 3RG40 24, 3RG40 31, 3RG 40 64

Operating distance 15 mm (nor-mal) 3RG40 30, 3RG40 34


3RG40 38


Operating distance 15 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 34, 3RG46 38

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

) ) )

7

/

7

/

7

/

/

7

/

7

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/117


Introduction

2


3RG40 41, 3RG46 26


Operating distance 20 mm (extra duty) 3RG 41 34, 3RG46 38




Operating distance 25 mm (nor-mal) 3RG40 32


Operating distance 25 mm (U BERO) 3RG46 44, 3RG46 48

Operating distance 30 mm (nor-mal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 42




Operating distance 40 mm (nor-mal) 3RG 40 33, 3RG40 43







7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

7

/

/

7

7

/

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/118


Introduction

Inductive BEROs

2

Further information

Active surface

The active surface of an inductive proximity switch is the surface through which an electromagnetic field is emitted (IEC).

The corresponding activation element (target) is moved toward this surface to trigger a switching process.

Axial approach

Axial approaching of the target is where its center point is lo-cated in the reference axis (IEC).

Axial distance to target ∆x

Distance between the actuating element and the BERO axis z at the response point A.

BERO lexicon

Some of the terms are defined in IEC 60947-5-2.

Current input

The current input is understood to be the current consumption of the proximity switch required to operate the oscillator, amplifier, etc. It does not include the current flowing through the load.

The no-load current I0 is the current drawn from the power sup-ply without a load being connected.

Differential travel H

Distance between the switching points when the target ap-proaches or is removed from the proximity switch (IEC).

The differential travel causes a defined switching response for the devices. The switching distance always refers to the switch-on point.

Free zone

Range around the proximity switch which must be kept free of materials which interfere with the characteristic features of the switch (IEC).

The volume of the free zone is defined by the dimensions r, c and w, g (see graphic).

Ak Response characteristic A Response point c, g Height points of the transition zone d Diameter of the BERO Q Active area r Radius of the free zone w Installed state z Reference axis ZB Attenuation zone ZF Free zone ZJ Inactive zone

Installation

Shielded proximity switches

A proximity switch can be shielded if any attenuating material (metal) can be attached around the active surface without influ-encing the characteristic features (IEC).

To ensure perfect functioning, a gap should be left in front of the active surface.

Unshielded proximity switches

A proximity switch cannot be shielded if a certain free zone is re-quired around its active surface in order to retain the character-istic features (IEC).

Semi-shielded proximity switches

A proximity switch that is semi-shielded also requires a certain free zone. However, flush mounting is permissible in non-attenu-ating materials.

Magnetic fields

Permanent magnetic fields and low-frequency alternating fields do not generally influence the function of the proximity switches. Strong fields may saturate the ferrite core of the switch and thus increase the operating distance or switch the device. On the other hand, damage is not probable.

High-frequency fields with frequencies of several hundred kHz can considerably interfere with the function (operating fre-quency of the sensors). Shielding is recommended in the event of difficulties with interference fields.

Non-equivalence

The 4-wire BEROs have two outputs:• A1 with NO function and• A2 with NC function.

npn connection

The output stage contains an npn transistor which connects the load to the negative operating voltage (0 V). The load is con-nected between the output and the positive operating voltage (+UB).

8!%9/&&:!"8!%9/":!"

2: !"#;!/"%

+:"% '

!&& "!( '(

! %!"&'"

w

dQ

ZFAk

ZJ

AZB

r

cg

z NSD01061

( 3+2

"!"#&%

( 3+2

"!"#&%

)

3

;

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/119


Introduction

2

Operating temperature

The specified operating temperature range must not be ex-ceeded. The proximity switch could then be damaged, and the operating response is undefined.

Operating distance

The operating distance is the distance at which a change in sig-nal is caused at the output when the target approaches the ac-tive surface along the reference axis (IEC).

Measurement of the operating distance is carried out according to IEC 60947-5-2 using a standard target and axial approach.

Rated operating distance sn

The rated operating distance is a conventional variable for defin-ing the operating distances. Neither specimen scatter nor changes resulting from external influences such as voltage or temperature are taken into account (IEC).

This operating distance applies when using the standard target according to IEC 60947-5-2 Reduction factors must be consid-ered if the material and/or size of the target differ from those of the standard target.

Real operating distance sr

Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured at defined temperature, voltage and mounting conditions (IEC).

This is the operating distance for a particular switch measured according to IEC 60947-5-2. The manufacturing tolerance is 10 %:

0.9 sn < sr < 1.1 sn

Usable operating distance su

Operating distance of a particular proximity switch measured under defined conditions (IEC).

This includes the additionally expected deviations caused by the variations in temperature and operating voltage within the specified ranges.

The usable operating distance is between 90 % and 110 % of the real operating distance. This results in the following for a re-liable design:

0.81 sn < su < 1.21 sn

Ensured operating distance (actuation distance) sa

Distance from the active surface at which actuation of the prox-imity switch is ensured under defined conditions (IEC).

The ensured operating distance is between zero and the bottom value of the useful operating distance:

0 < sa < 0.81 sn

sa Working distance sn Rated operating distance sr Real operating distance smin min. useful operating distance su

(= working distance sa)smax max. useful operating distance su

Operational voltage

The operating voltage is specified including 10 % residual rip-ple.

Output

The BERO proximity switches are available with different output connections.

2-wire, DC or AC/DC, load connected in series with BERO

3-wire, DC, pnp, load connected between A and L–

3-wire, DC, npn, load connected between A and L+

4-wire, antivalent, DC, load connected between A1, A2 and L–

Output resistance

The BERO proximity switches have a built-in output resistance so that the output voltage can follow the switching status even without an external load. A load resistance must be connected when operating with high switching frequencies (to reduce the electric time constant).

Parallel connection

Parallel connection of proximity switches to implement logical functions is possible with 3-wire and 4-wire BEROs without prob-lem, but not with 2-wire BEROs.

Please note:• The power consumption increases.• Leakage currents add up so that an impermissible voltage

drop may occur at the load even in the off state.

See graphics, Page 114.

pnp connection

The output stage contains a pnp transistor which connects the load to the positive operating voltage (+UB). The load is con-nected between the output and the negative operating voltage (0 V).

<

<

<

<

"

/<

<

!"

!"

/<

<

< "

"!"#&%

3+2

NSD01055

L+

L-

NSD01057

L+

L-

A

NSD01056

L+

L-

A

NSD01058

L+

L-

A2

A1

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/120


Introduction

Inductive BEROs

2

Power-up delay tvDuration between switching on the power supply and the begin-ning of the proximity switch’s operational readiness (IEC).

Power supply units

Single-phase power supply units must be smoothed with at least 1000 µF/A. For noise suppression reasons, this measure is also necessary with three-phase power supply units.

Programming

Selection of NO or NC function using slide switch in bottom part of enclosure or plug-in jumper in the electronics base. Only with certain cubic BEROs.

Rated operational current Ie (output current)

The sensors are designed for a specific maximum output cur-rent. If this current is exceeded, even briefly, the built-in overload protection will be activated. Incandescent lamps, capacitors and other strongly capacitive loads (e.g. long leads) have ef-fects similar to an overload.

Reduction factors

The specified operating distance s refers to exactly defined measuring conditions (see operating distance). Reduced oper-ating distances usually result with other arrangements. The re-duction factors (see Technical specifications) are only approxi-mate values. Deviations may result depending on different alloys and the type.

Influence of geometry

If a smaller target is used than the standard target defined in IEC 60947-5-2, the operating distance must be corrected by a reduction factor.

Reference axis z

Axis running perpendicular to the active surface and through its center (IEC).

Residual voltage

The residual voltage is the voltage measured across the load with the output disabled.

Residual current irThe residual current is the current which flows in the load circuit of the proximity switch in the disabled condition (IEC).

It is used to retain the function, and must primarily be observed with parallel connections.

Residual ripple

The maximum value of the residual ripple from peak to peak must not exceed 10 % of the rated voltage Un. The switching re-sponse may be undefined if the residual ripple is large. Correc-

tion is possible using a larger smoothing capacitor or a regu-lated power supply.

Release point B

The position, e.g. in the attenuation zone, at which the bottom rear edge of the actuating element is located at the moment the signal changes when removing.

Resistance to oil

The proximity switches with degree of protection IP67 are not suitable for permanent operation in an environment containing oil. The following must therefore be observed:

Lubricating oils

Usually present no problem.

Hydraulic oils, cutting oils

These attack most plastics. In particular, the PVC lines become discolored and brittle.

Measures: avoid contact with these liquids if possible, especially on the active surface.

Response curve

The line on which all response points A for a BERO can be found. The curve has been determined using the standard target. The sensor-related characteristics can be obtained from it. The BERO axis z coincides with the y axis.

Ak Response characteristic A Response point B Release point H Differential travel s Operating distance x Direction of motion ∆x Triggering distance y Distance to BERO z Reference axis

Repeat accuracy R

The repeat accuracy is the change in the real operating distance sr at defined conditions (IEC).

The repeat accuracy is measured over a period of 8 hours at an ambient temperature of 23 °C (± 5 °C), any relative humidity within the specified range, and a defined supply voltage.

The difference between any two measurements must not exceed 10 % of the real operating distance sr. The repeat accuracy is usually far better in the case of measurements immediately fol-lowing one another.

Response delay tAThe response delay is the duration which the switching element requires for response when the target enters or leaves the sens-ing range (IEC).

The value is measured at s = 0.5 × sn.

Response point A

The position of the actuating element when the signal is output. The reference point is the bottom front edge of the actuating el-ement.

Series connection

See graphics, Page 114.

)

3

;

+(!'!;("#9& #

+;%

!"&%

7 =

)>

3)

3 6

)

"!"#&%

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/121


Introduction

2

Smallest operating current Im (minimum load current)

The current required to retain the conductivity of the switching el-ements in the ON state (IEC). This applies to 2-wire BEROs.

Standard target

The standard target is a defined part used for comparison mea-surements of the operating distances and sensing ranges (IEC).

Material of standard target: St 37, 1 mm thick

Dimensions of square standard target: the side length is equal to• the diameter of the inscribed circle on the active surface of the

BERO or• three times the rated operating distance sn if 3 × sn is greater

than the diameter of the inscribed circle.

Switching element function

NO function

An NO function results in a flow of load current when the target is sensed, and no flow of the load current when the target is not sensed (IEC).

NC function

An NC function results in no flow of load current when the target is sensed, and a flow of load current when the target is not sensed (IEC).

Switching frequency f

Number of switching operations of a proximity switch within a defined time interval (IEC).

The switching frequency is the maximum possible switching rate between the damped and non-damped statuses at which the output circuit still delivers a defined signal sequence corre-sponding to the activation.

Switching frequency sa

See under operating distances.

Target (actuating element)

Parts made of metal with which BEROs are actuated in service.

Form, material and dimensions influence the response charac-teristic of the BERO (see reduction factors).

The specified rated operating distances sn were determined us-ing the minimum surface defined in the standard (see character-istic). The usable operating distance su is reduced if the surface is less than the minimum.

Temperature drift

The specified operating distances refer to an ambient tempera-ture of 20 °C. Within the permissible temperature range of –25 to +70 °C, the operating distance varies by max. ±10 % compared to the value at 20 °C.

The temperature of the target alone has practically no influence on the operating distance.

Tightening torque

Excessive tightening of the nuts could mechanically damage the BERO proximity switches. The maximum permissible torques are specified in the Technical specifications.

SIt specifies the maximum permissible number of pulses per second at a constant pulse : Pause = 1 : 2 and half the rated op-erating distance sn. The measurement is carried out according to IEC 60947-5-2.

Voltage drop

A voltage drop (dependent on the current) occurs across the output transistor in the conductive state; the output voltage does not quite reach the associated operating voltage (to be particu-larly observed with a series connection and electronic inputs).

Welding-resistant

Sensors which can be used in strong magnetic fields, e.g. dur-ing arc welding, or in fields of electrolysis plants.

The maximum permissible value is specified for specially se-lected sensors, e.g. U BERO.

?

"

!!78!%9

"/%";%!' !(

!%

. #

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/122


Operating distance 0.6 mm

Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard IP68 IP68No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wireForm Ø 3 mm, mini Ø 4 mm, mini M 5, mini

Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded

Rated operating distance sn 0.6 mm 0.6 mm 0.6 mm

Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel

Operational voltage (DC) V 10 ... 30 10 ... 30 10 ... 30

No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 10 ≤ 10 ≤ 10

Rated operating current Ie mA 100 200 200


Repeat accuracy R mm 0.01 0.01 0.01


Switching status display Yellow LED – –

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection – – –• Inductive interference

protection• • •

• Radio interference protection • • •

Degree of protection IP67 IP68 IP68

Type 3RG46 03–2AB00 3RG46 00–0AG02 3RG46 10–0AG02

Switching output Circ. diag.No.

Con-nector type

Order No. Order No. Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR 3 × 0.055 mm2 3 × 0.14 mm2 3 × 0.14 mm2

NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 03–2AB00 3RG46 00–0AG02 3RG46 10–0AG02

NO contact, npn 13 – – –

Mounting instructions

Dimension depending on form

A = active area B = metal-free area

3RG46 03–2AB00 3RG46 00–0AG02 3RG46 10–0AG02

)

3

)

3

)

3

)

3

A

B

NS

D0_

003

05

5

2,4

A

B2

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/123



2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wireForm 5 mm × 5 mm, mini Ø 4 mm, mini M 5, mini



Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Stainless steel Stainless steel


No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 10 ≤ 10 ≤ 10





Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection – – –• Inductive interference




Type 3RG46 36–0AG00 3RG46 36–0GB00

3RG46 00–1AB00 3RG46 10–.AG00 3RG46 10–.GB00


Con-nector type



NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 36–0AG00 3RG46 00–1AB00 3RG46 10–0AG00

NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 36–0GB00 – 3RG46 10–0GB00

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A, C – – 3RG46 10–7AG00

NO contact, npn 4 A, C – – 3RG46 10–7GB00


Dimension depending on form


3RG46 36–0..00 3RG46 00–1AB00 3RG46 10–0..00 3RG46 10–7..00

NSD0_00311a

5

2,4

A

B

A

B

3,3

)

3

)

3

A

B

NS

D0_

003

06a

5

2,4

A

B3,3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/124


Operating distance 1 mm

Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wireForm M 8 M 8

Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded

Rated operating distance sn 1 mm 1 mm

Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steel

Operational voltage (DC) V 15 ... 34 10 ... 30

No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 1

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 50


Repeat accuracy R mm 0.1 0.1


Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • •• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection • –• Inductive interference

protection• •

• Radio interference protection • •

Degree of protection IP67 IP67

Type 3RG40 11–.A.00 3RG40 11–.GB00

3RG40 11–.CC00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR 3 × 0.25 mm2 4 × 0.14 mm2

NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 11–0AG00 –

NC contact, pnp 12 3RG40 11–0AF00 –

NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 11–0GB00 –

NO and NC con-tacts, pnp

10 – 3RG40 11–0CC00

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A, C 3RG40 11–7AG00 –

NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG40 11–7AF00 –


1 B – 3RG40 11–7CC00

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG40 11–3AG00 –

NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 11–3AF00 –

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 11–3GB00 –


4 F – 3RG40 11–3CC00



3RG40 11–0..00 3RG40 11–7..00 3RG40 11–3..00

)

3

)

3

NS

D00

312

LED

50

M 8x1

34S

W 1

3

#

@

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/125



2



Dimension drawings

Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (DC 65 V)No. of connecting wires 2-wire 3-wireForm M 8 M 8





No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 1,5 ≤ 10






Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof – •• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection • •• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG40 11–.JB00 3RG40 11–.AB00 3RG40 11–.AA00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 – 3RG40 11–0AB00

NC contact, pnp 12 – 3RG40 11–0AA00

NO contact 15 3RG40 11–0JB00 –

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A – 3RG40 11–7AB00

NC contact, pnp 3 A – 3RG40 11–7AA00

NO contact 7 A 3RG40 11–7JB00 –

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F – 3RG40 11–3AB00

NC contact, pnp 3 F – 3RG40 11–3AA00

NO contact 6 E, F 3RG40 11–3JB00 –



3RG40 11–0JB00 3RG40 11–7JB00 3RG40 11–3JB00 3RG40 11–0A.00 3RG40 11–7A.00 3RG40 11–3A.00

)

3

)

3

NS

D00

312

LED

50

M 8x1

34S

W 1

3

#

@

A

#

! $

%

&

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/126



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wireForm Ø 6.5 mm, mini Ø 6.5 mm, shorty Ø 6.5 mm





No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 10 ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)





Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection – • •• Inductive interference




Type 3RG46 01–...00 3RG40 50–.A.33 3RG40 50–.G.33

3RG40 50–.A.05 3RG40 50–.G.05


Con-nector type



NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 01–1AB00 3RG40 50–0AG33 3RG40 50–0AG05

NC contact, pnp 12 – 3RG40 50–0AF33 3RG40 50–0AF05

NO contact, npn 13 – 3RG40 50–0GB33 3RG40 50–0GB05

NC contact, npn 14 – 3RG40 50–0GA33 3RG40 50–0GA05

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG46 01–7AG00 3RG40 50–7AG33 3RG40 50–7AG05

NC contact, pnp 3 A – 3RG40 50–7AF33 3RG40 50–7AF05

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 01–7GB00 3RG40 50–7GB33 3RG40 50–7GB05

NC contact, npn 5 A – 3RG40 50–7GA33 3RG40 50–7GA05


3RG46 01

3RG46 01–1AB00 3RG46 01–7..00 3RG40 50–0..33 3RG40 50–7..33 3RG40 50–0..05 3RG40 50–7..05

3RG40 50


)

3

)

3

,-

#

,-

#

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/127



2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wireForm M 8, mini Ø 8 mm, shorty 8 mm × 8 mm



Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Stainless steel Brass, nickel-plated


No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 10 ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 10

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200





Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection – • –• Inductive interference




Type 3RG46 11–0AG31 3RG46 11–7..31

3RG40 51–.A.33 3RG40 51–.G.33

3RG46 37–.A.00 3RG46 37–.G.00


Con-nector type



NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 11–0AG31 3RG40 51–0AG33 3RG46 37–0AB00

NC contact, pnp 12 – 3RG40 51–0AF33 –

NO contact, npn 13 – 3RG40 51–0GB33 3RG46 37–0GG00

NC contact, npn 14 – 3RG40 51–0GA33 –

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG46 11–7AG31 3RG40 51–7AG33 3RG46 37–7AB00

NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG46 11–7AF31 3RG40 51–7AF33 3RG46 37–7AA00

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 11–7GB31 3RG40 51–7GB33 3RG46 37–7GG00

NC contact, npn 5 A – 3RG40 51–7GA33 –


3RG46 11, 3RG40 51

3RG46 11–0AG31 3RG46 11–7..31 3RG40 51–0..33 3RG40 51–7..33 3RG46 37–0..00

3RG46 37–7..00

3RG46 37


)

3

)

3

M 8x1

16N

SD

0033

8 LED

SW

13

@

,-

#

,-

#

#

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/128



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wireForm M 8, Shorty M 8 M 8





No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 1,0

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 50





Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection • • –• Inductive interference




Type 3RG40 11–.A.33 3RG40 11–.G.33

3RG40 11–.A.05 3RG40 11–.G.05

3RG40 11–.CC05


Con-nector type



NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 11–0AG33 3RG40 11–0AG05 –

NC contact, pnp 12 3RG40 11–0AF33 3RG40 11–0AF05 –

NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 11–0GB33 3RG40 11–0GB05 –

NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 11–0GA33 3RG40 11–0GA05 –


10 – – 3RG40 11–0CC05

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG40 11–7AG33 3RG40 11–7AG05 –

NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG40 11–7AF33 3RG40 11–7AF05 –

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG40 11–7GB33 – –

NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG40 11–7GA33 – –


1 – – 3RG40 11–7CC05

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F – 3RG40 11–3AG05 –

NC contact, pnp 3 F – 3RG40 11–3AF05 –

NO contact, npn 4 E, F – 3RG40 11–3GB05 –

NC contact, npn 5 F – 3RG40 11–3GA05 –


1 F – – 3RG40 11–3CC05



3RG40 11–0..33 3RG40 11–7..33 3RG40 11–0..05 3RG40 11–7..05 3RG40 11–3..05

)

3

)

3

! $

#

%

,

#

NS

D00

312

LED

50

M 8x1

34S

W 1

3

#

@

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/129



2



Dimension drawings

Class U BERO (without reduction factor)No. of connecting wires 3-wireForm M 8

Embeddable in metal Shielded

Rated operating distance sn 1.5 mm

Enclosure material Stainless steel

Operational voltage (DC) V 10 ... 30

No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 13


Switching frequency f Hz < 2000

Repeat accuracy R mm 0.16

Power-up delay tv ms ≤ 8


Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof •• Reverse polarity protection •• Wire-break protection •• Inductive interference

protectionMagnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s.

• Radio interference protection •


Type 3RG46 11–.AN01 3RG46 11–.GN01


Con-nector type

Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR 3 × 0.25 mm2

NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 11–0AN01

NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 11–0GN01

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG46 11–7AN01

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 11–7GN01

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 11–3AN01

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 11–3GN01



3RG46 11–0.N01 3RG46 11–7.N01 3RG46 11–3.N01

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/130



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Standard Standard Standard

No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 3-wire 4-wire

Form M 12, Shorty M 12, Shorty M 12 M 12

Embeddable in metal Shielded Shielded Shielded Shielded

Rated operating distance sn 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm

Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-platedOperational voltage (DC) V 15 ... 34 15 ... 34 15 ... 34 15 ... 34

No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 1,0 ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 25 (24 V); ≤ 40 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 50 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)

Switching frequency f Hz 1200 800 1200 1200

Repeat accuracy R mm 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

Power-up delay tv ms 40 3 40 40

Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • • •• Wire-break protection • – • •• Inductive interference

protection• • • •

• Radio interference protection • • • •

Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67

Type 3RG40 12–.A.33 3RG40 12–.G.33

3RG40 12–0CD10 3RG40 12–3CD11

3RG40 12–.A.01 3RG40 12–.G.00

3RG40 12–0CD00 3RG40 12–3CD00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 12–0AG33 3RG40 12–0AG01

NC contact, pnp 12 3RG40 12–0AF33 3RG40 12–0AF01

NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 12–0GB33 3RG40 12–0GB00

NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 12–0GA33 3RG40 12–0GA00

4 × 0.14 mm2 4 × 0.14 mm2


10 3RG40 12–0CD10 3RG40 12–0CD00

With M 12 connector 3-wire 3-wire

NO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG40 12–3AG33 3RG40 12–3AG01

NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 12–3AF33 3RG40 12–3AF01

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 12–3GB33 3RG40 12–3GB00

NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 12–3GA33 –

4-wire 4-wire


1 F 3RG40 12–3CD11 3RG40 12–3CD00



3RG40 12–0..33 3RG40 12–0CD10 3RG40 12–0..00 3RG40 12–0..01

3RG40 12–3..00 3RG40 12–3..00

3RG40 12–3..33 3RG40 12–3CD11)

3

)

3

NS

D00

366

35

M 12x1

SW

17

LED

4

@

#

,-

,-

@

#

,-

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/131



2



Dimension drawings

Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 2-wire 3-wire 2-wireForm M 12 M 12 M 12


Rated operating distance sn 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm

Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-platedOperational voltage• DC V 15 ... 34 10 ... 65 20 ... 320• AC V – – 20 ... 265

No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA 1.5 ≤ 10 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1.5

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 25 300 200• 20 ms mA – – 1800

Minimum load current mA 2 – 5

Switching frequency f Hz 700 1200 (NO contact), 4000 (NC contact) 25/1200 (AC/DC)




Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof – • –• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection • • •• Inductive interference




Type 3RG40 12–.JB00 3RG40 12–.AB003RG40 12–.AA00

3RG40 12–.KB00 3RG40 12–.KA00


Con-nector type



NO contact, pnp 11 – 3RG40 12–0AB00 –

NC contact, pnp 12 – 3RG40 12–0AA00 –

NO contact 15 3RG40 12–0GB00 – –

NO contact 16 – – 3RG40 12–0KB00

NC contact 17 – – 3RG40 12–0KA00

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F – 3RG40 12–3AB00 –

NC contact, pnp 3 F – 3RG40 12–3AA00 –

NO contact 6 E, F 3RG40 12–3JB00 – –

NO contact 8 E, F – – 3RG40 12–3KB00

NC contact 9 F – – 3RG40 12–3KA00



The mounting diagram on the previous page applies to 3RG40 12–.JB00

3RG40 12–0JB00 3RG40 12–3JB00 3RG40 12–0A.00 3RG40 12–3A.00 3RG40 12–0K.00 3RG40 12–3K.00

)

3

)

3

@

#

,- LED

NS

D00

364

56

4

M 12x1

SW

17

NSD00365

65

M 12x1

54

LED (4x)

SW

17

4

Sg LED

NS

D00

364

56

4

M 12x1

SW

17

NSD00365

65

M 12x1

54

LED (4x)

SW

17

4

Sg

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/132



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 KNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wireForm Ø 12 mm M 12 M 12



Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated


No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)





Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection • • •• Inductive interference



Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K

Type 3RG40 52–0A.30 3RG40 52–0G.30

3RG40 12–0A.30 3RG40 12–0G.30

3RG40 12–0AG31 3RG40 12–0GB31


Con-nector type


With 2 m cable, PUR 3 × 0.25 mm2 3 × 0.25 mm2 PVC, 3 × 0.25 mm2

NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 52–0AG30 3RG40 12–0AG30 3RG40 12–0AG31


NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 52–0GB30 3RG40 12–0GB30 3RG40 12–0GB31




3RG40 52–0..30 3RG40 12–0..30 3RG40 12–0..31

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/133



2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (VW)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm M 8, Shorty M 8



Enclosure material Stainless steel Stainless steelOperational voltage (DC) V 15 ... 34 10 ... 34

No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)

Switching frequency f Hz 600 600 (with –3AG22: 1000)




Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • •• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection • •• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG41 11–.A.33 3RG41 11–.G.33

3RG41 11–.AG00 3RG41 11–3AG22


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.

With 2 m cable, PUR 3 × 0.25 mm2 3 m, 3 × 0.25 mm2




NC contact, npn 14 3RG41 11–0GA33 –

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG41 11–7AG33 –

NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG41 11–7AF33 –

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG41 11–7GB33 –

NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG41 11–7GA33 –

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F – 3RG41 11–3AG00

NO contact, pnp 2 E, F – 3RG41 11–3AG22



3RG41 11–0..33 3RG41 11–7..33 3RG41 11–0..00 3RG41 11–3..00 3RG41 11–3..22

)

3

)

3

NS

D00

312

LED

50

M 8x1

34S

W 1

3

#

%

&

! $

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/134



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wireForm Cubic 12 mm × 40 mm Cubic 12 mm × 32 mm



Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic


No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 1,0





Switching status display Yellow LED –

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • •• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection • –• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG40 70–.AG45 3RG40 71–0CD00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.




10 – 3RG40 71–0CD00




These BEROs can be mounted next to one another.

3RG40 70–0AG45 3RG40 71–0CD00

3RG40 70–7AG45

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/135



2



Dimension drawings












Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • •• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection • •• Inductive interference protection • •• Radio interference protection • •


Type 3RG40 70–.A.01 3RG40 70–.CD00, 3RG40 70–7CD01, 3RG40 70–7CD02

Switching output Circ. diag. No.

Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.




NO and NC contacts, pnp

10 – 3RG40 70–0CD00


NO and NC contacts, pnp; LED q NO

1 A – 3RG40 70–7CD01

NO and NC contacts, pnp; LED q NC

1 A – 3RG40 70–7CD02

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG40 70–3AG01 –

NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 70–3AF01 –


1 F – 3RG40 70–3CD00




3RG40 70–0..00, 3RG40 70–0..01

3RG40 70–7..01, 3RG40 70–7..02

3RG40 70–3..00, 3RG40 70–3..01

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/136



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm Ø 6.5 mm M 8

Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded

Rated operating distance sn 2.5 mm 2.5 mm










protection• •



Type 3RG40 60–.A.00 3RG40 60–.G.00

3RG40 21–.CD00


Connec-tor type

Order No. Order No.






With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG40 60–7AG33 3RG40 21–7AG33

NC contact, pnp 3 A 3RG40 60–7AF33 3RG40 21–7AF33

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG40 60–7GB33 3RG40 21–7GB33

NC contact, npn 5 A 3RG40 60–7GA33 3RG40 21–7GA33



3RG40 60–0..33 3RG40 60–7..33 3RG40 21–0..33 3RG40 21–7..33

,-

#

,-

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/137



2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wireForm M 14 M 14


Rated operating distance sn 2.5 mm 2.5 mm










protection• •



Type 3RG40 72–.GB.00 3RG40 72–.GA.00

3RG40 72–.CD00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.



NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 72–0GA00 –


10 – 3RG40 72–0CD00

With M 12 connectorNO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 72–3GB00 –

NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 72–3GA00 –


1 F – 3RG40 72–3CD00




3RG40 72–0..00 3RG40 72–3..00 Plan view

)

3

)

3

#

NS

D00

400 12

27

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/138



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings




Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic

Operational voltage• DC V 15 ... 34 10 ... 65 20 ... 320• AC V – – 20 ... 265

No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA 1.5 ≤ 10 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1.5



Switching frequency f Hz 800 800 25/1000 (AC/DC)








Type 3RG40 72–.JB00 3RG40 72–.AB003RG40 72–.AA00

3RG40 72–.KB00 3RG40 72–.KA00


Con-nector type





NO contact 15 3RG40 72–0JB00 – –










3RG40 72–0..00 3RG40 72–3..00 Plan view

)

3

)

3

#

NS

D00

400 12

27

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/139



2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance (IP68) Greater rated operating distance (IP68)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm Ø 6.5 mm M 8

Embeddable in metal Shielded Semi-shielded

Rated operating distance sn 2,5 mm 2,5 mm



No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 10 ≤ 10





Switching status display – –

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • •• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection – –• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG46 02–0AG02 3RG46 11–0AG02


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.




3RG46 02

3RG46 02–0AG02 3RG46 11–0AG02

3RG46 11


X ≥ 1.6 mm when mounted in steel, X ≥ 0.8 mm when mounted in other metal

)

3

)

3

)

3

B

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/140



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distanceNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm Ø 6.5 mm M 8

Embeddable in metal Semi-shielded Semi-shielded


Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated









protection• •



Type 3RG46 02–.AB00, 3RG46 02–.AG013RG46 02–.GB01

3RG46 11–.AG01 3RG46 11–.GB01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 02–1AB00 3RG46 11–0AG01

NO contact, npn 13 – 3RG46 11–0GB01

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG46 02–7AG01 3RG46 11–7AG01


NO contact, npn 4 E, F – 3RG46 11–3GB01


Dimension depending on design




3RG46 02–1AB01 3RG46 02–7AG01 3RG46 11–0..01 3RG46 11–7..01 3RG46 11–3..01

)

3

B

)

3

)

3

B

)

3

#

#

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/141



2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distanceNo. of connecting wires 3-wireForm 8 mm × 8 mm

Embeddable in metal Semi-shielded

Rated operating distance sn 3 mm

Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated








Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof •• Reverse polarity protection •• Wire-break protection –• Inductive interference

protection•



Type 3RG46 37–.AG013RG46 37–.GB01


Con-nector type

Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 37–0AG01

NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 37–0GB01

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG46 37–7AG01

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 37–7GB01




3RG46 02–0..01 3RG46 02–7..01

)

3

B

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/142



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings




Enclosure material Brass or stainless steel










• Radio interference protection •• Protective insulation •

Degree of protection• Brass enclosure IP67• Stainless steel enclosure IP68

Type 3RG46 12–.AN.. 3RG46 12–.GN..


Con-nector type

Order No.


Brass, chrome-platedNO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 12–0AN01


Stainless steelNO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 12–0AN61


With M 12 connectorBrass, chrome-platedNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 12–3AN01


Brass, teflon-coatedNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 12–3AN05


Stainless steelNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 12–3AN61




3RG46 12–0.N.. 3RG46 12–3.N..

)

3

)

3

NSD00414

LEDSg

52

M 12x1

SW

17

4

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/143


Operating distance 3 mm,pressure resistant up to 500 bar

2



Dimension drawings

Class Pressure-resistant up to 500 bar (7250 psi)No. of connecting wires 3-wireForm M 14



Enclosure material Stainless steel, sensor surface aluminium oxide ceramic







Switching status display –

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof •• Reverse polarity protection –• Wire-break protection •• Inductive interference

protection•

• Radio interference protection –


Type 3RG46 52–.P.00


Con-nector type

Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 52–0PG00

NC contact, pnp 12 3RG46 52–0PF00

NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 52–0PB00

NC contact, npn 14 3RG46 52–0PA00

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 52–3PG00

NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG46 52–3PF00

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 52–3PB00

NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG46 52–3PA00




3RG46 52–0P.00 3RG46 52–3P.00

)

3

B

)

3

M 14 x 1,518,6

3056

,5

NS

D0_

0040

9a

SW 19

12,3

18,6

3065

M 12x1

NS

D0_

0040

8a

SW 19

12,3

Sg

M 14 x 1,5

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/144



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Standard Standard StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 3-wire 4-wireForm M 12, Shorty M 12, Shorty M 12 M 12

Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded

Rated operating distance sn 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm 4 mm

Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-platedOperational voltage (DC) V 15 ... 34 15 ... 34 15 ... 34 15 ... 34

No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) 1,0 ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V) ≤ 25 (24 V); ≤ 40 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 50 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)

Switching frequency f Hz 800 800 800 800

Repeat accuracy R mm 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2

Power-up delay tv ms 40 40 40 40

Switching status display Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • • •• Wire-break protection • – • –• Inductive interference

protection• • • •

• Radio interference protection • • • •

Degree of protection IP67 IP67 IP67 IP67

Type 3RG40 22–.A.33 3RG40 22–.G.33

3RG40 22–0CD10 3RG40 22–3CD11

3RG40 22–.A.01 3RG40 22–.G.00

3RG40 22–0CD00 3RG40 22–3CD00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.






4 × 0.14 mm2 4 × 0.14 mm2


10 3RG40 22–0CD10 3RG40 22–0CD00

With M 12 connector 3-wire 3-wire

NO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG40 22–3AG33 3RG40 22–3AG01

NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 22–3AF33 3RG40 22–3AF01

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 22–3GB33 3RG40 22–3GB00

NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 22–3GA33 3RG40 22–3GA00

4-wire 4-wire


1 F 3RG40 22–3CD11 3RG40 22–3CD00



3RG40 22–0..33 3RG40 22–0CD10 3RG40 22–0..00 3RG40 22–0..01

3RG40 22–3..00 3RG40 22–3..01

3RG40 22–3..33 3RG40 22–3CD11

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/145



2



Dimension drawings

Class StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wireForm Cubic 12 mm × 40 mm

Embeddable in metal Unshielded


Enclosure material Molded plastic


No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)






protection•



Type 3RG40 80–.AG45


Con-nector type

Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 80–0AG45

With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG40 80–7AG45




3RG40 80–0AG45 3RG40 80–7AG45

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/146



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings


Embeddable in metal Unshielded Unshielded Unshielded



No-load supply current I0• At DC 24 V mA ≤ 1.5 ≤ 10 1.0• At AC 230 V mA – – 1.5











Type 3RG40 22–.JB00 3RG40 22–.AB00 3RG40 22–.AA00

3RG40 22–.KB00 3RG40 22–.KA00


Con-nector type















3RG40 22–0JB00 3RG40 22–3JB00 3RG40 22–0A.00 3RG40 22–3A.00 3RG40 22–0K.00 3RG40 22–3K.00

A

,-

#

A

,-

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/147



2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG40 62–0A.30 3RG40 62–0G.30

3RG40 22–0A.30 3RG40 22–0G.30

3RG40 22–0AG31 3RG40 22–0GB31


Con-nector type









3RG40 62–0..30 3RG40 22–0..30 3RG40 22–0..31

)

3

)

3

A

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/148



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K (65 V DC) IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 2-wireForm M 12 M 12




Operational voltage• DC V 10 ... 65 20 ... 320• AC V – 20 ... 265

No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 10 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – 1.5

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 300 200• 20 ms mA – 1200

Minimum load current mA – 5

Switching frequency f Hz 800 25/900 (AC/DC)




Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • –• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection • •• Inductive interference

protection• •


Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K

Type 3RG40 22–.AB30 3RG40 22–.KB30


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 22–0AB30 –

NO contact 16 – 3RG40 22–0KB30



3RG40 22–0AB30 3RG40 22–0KB30

)

3

)

3

LED

NS

D00

364

56

4

M 12x1

SW

17

LED

NS

D00

364

56

4

M 12x1

SW

17

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/149



2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance (VW) Greater rated operating distance (VW)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm M 12, Shorty M 12












protection• •



Type 3RG41 12–.AG33 3RG41 12–.A.01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.



NC contact, pnp 12 – 3RG41 12–0AF01

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG41 12–3AG33 3RG41 12–3AG01

NC contact, pnp 3 F – 3RG41 12–3AF01



3RG41 12–0AG33 3RG41 12–3AG33 3RG41 12–0A.01 3RG41 12–3A.01

)

3

)

3

NS

D00

366

35

M 12x1

SW

17

LED

4

,-

@

#

@

#

,-

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/150



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings




Enclosure material Stainless steel




Switching frequency f Hz < 2000








Type 3RG46 11–.AN01 3RG46 11–.GN01


Con-nector type

Order No.




With 8 mm combined connectorNO contact, pnp 2 A 3RG46 21–7AN01

NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 21–7GN01

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 21–3AN01




3RG46 21–0.N01 3RG46 21–7.N01 3RG46 21–3.N01

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/151



2



Dimension drawings




Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-platedOperational voltage (DC) V 15 ... 34 15 ... 34 15 ... 34











Type 3RG40 13–.A.33, 3RG40 13–.G.33

3RG40 13–.A.01, 3RG40 13–.G.00

3RG40 13–.CD00


Con-nector type








10 – – 3RG40 13–0CD00

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG40 13–3AG33 3RG40 13–3AG01 –

NC contact, pnp 3 F 3RG40 13–3AF33 3RG40 13–3AF01 –

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG40 13–3GB33 3RG40 13–3GB00 –

NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 13–3GA33 3RG40 13–3GA00 –


1 F – – 3RG40 13–3CD00



3RG40 13–0..33 3RG40 13–3..33 3RG40 13–0..00 3RG40 13–0..01

3RG40 13–3..00 3RG40 13–3..01

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/152



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Standard Extra duty (65 V DC)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 3-wireForm Ø 18 mm (button) M 14 M 14

Embeddable in metal Shielded Unshielded Unshielded

Rated operating distance sn 5 mm (3.2 mm) 5 mm 2,5 mm



No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 1,5 ≤ 25 (24 V); ≤ 40 (34 V) ≤ 10

Rated operating current Ie mA 50 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 300



Power-up delay tv ms 1,0 40 40

Switching status display – Yellow LED Yellow LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression – • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof – • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection – • •• Inductive interference




Type 3RG40 75–0..00 3RG40 82–.CD00 3RG40 82–.AB00


Con-nector type



NO contact, pnp 13 – – 3RG40 82–0AB00


10 – 3RG40 82–0CD00 –

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 4 E, F – – 3RG40 82–3AB00


1 F – 3RG40 82–3CD00 –

With single conductors, 0.5 m, PVC

3 × 0.25 mm2

NO contact, pnp 11 3RG40 75–0AJ00 – –

NC contact, pnp 12 3RG40 75–0AH00 – –

NO contact, npn 13 3RG40 75–0GJ00 – –


3RG40 82


3RG40 75 3RG40 82–0..00 3RG40 82–3..00 Plan view


3RG40 75–0GJ00 also possible with non-embedded mounting: Rated operating distance sn = 3.2 mm

)

3

)

3

#

NS

D00

400 12

27

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/153



2



Dimension drawings





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤1.5 ≤ 10 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1.5



Switching frequency f Hz 400 800 (NO contact), 4000 (NC contact) 25/490 (AC/DC)








Type 3RG40 13–.JB00 3RG40 13–.AB00, 3RG40 13–.AA00

3RG40 13–.KB00, 3RG40 13–.KA00


Con-nector type















3RG40 13–0..00 3RG40 13–0..01

3RG40 13–3..00 3RG40 13–3..01

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/154



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 KNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 3-wireForm Ø 18 mm M 18 M 18















Type 3RG40 53–0A.30, 3RG40 53–0G.30

3RG40 13–0A.30, 3RG40 13–0G.30

3RG40 13–0AG31, 3RG40 13–0GB31


Con-nector type









3RG40 53–0..30 3RG40 13–0..30 3RG40 13–0..31

)

3

)

3 18

NS

D00

459

54

LED

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/155



2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG46 13–.AN.., 3RG46 13–.GN..


Con-nector type

Order No.














3RG46 13–0.N.. 3RG46 13–3.N..

)

3

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/156



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distanceNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm M 8 M 12

Embeddable in metal Unshielded Semi-shielded











protection• •



Type 3RG46 21–.A.02, 3RG46 21–.G.02

3RG46 12–.A.01, 3RG46 12–.G.01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.





NO contact, npn 4 A 3RG46 21–7GB02 –

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 21–3AG02 3RG46 12–3AB01

NO contact, nnn 2 E, F 3RG46 21–3GB02 3RG46 12–3GB01


Dimension depending on design



3RG46 21–0..02 3RG46 21–7..02 3RG46 21–3..02 3RG46 12–0..01 3RG46 12–3..01

)

3

)

3

)

3

B

)

3

#

@

#

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/157


Operating distance 0 to 6 mm,with analog output

2



Dimension drawings

Class Analog outputNo. of connecting wires 4-wireForm M 12


Rated operating distance sn 0 ... 6 mm



No-load supply current I0 mA 10




Output voltage (A1) at 25 C• With s = 0 mm V 0 (–0 ... +0.2 V)• With s = 3 mm V +2.7 (±0.2 V)• With s = 6 mm V +5.0 (±0.2 V)

Load current at voltage output Max. 10 mA

Output current (A2) at 25 C• With s = 0 mm mA 1.0 (±0.2 mA)• With s = 6 mm mA 5.0 (±0.2 mA)

Max. resistive load at current output• With UB = 10 V kΩ 1• With UB = 30 V kΩ 5

Switching status display –

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression –• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof •• Reverse polarity protection •• Wire-break protection –• Inductive interference

protection•

• Radio interference protection –


Type 3RG46 12–.NB00

Analog output Circ. diag.No.

Con-nector type

Order No.


Voltage + current 30 3RG46 12–0NB00

With M 12 connectorVoltage + current 30 F 3RG46 12–3NB00



3RG46 12–0NB00 3RG46 12–3NB00

)

3

)

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/158



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings















Type 3RG40 23–.A.33, 3RG40 23–.G.33

3RG40 23–.A.01, 3RG40 23–.G.00

3RG40 23–.CD00


Con-nector type






NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 23–0GA33 – –


10 – – 3RG40 23–0CD00




NC contact, npn 5 F 3RG40 23–3GA33 – –


1 F – – 3RG40 23–3CD00


3RG40 23–...33


3RG40 23–0..33 3RG40 23–3..33 3RG40 23–0..00 3RG40 23–0..01

3RG40 23–3..00 3RG40 23–3..01

)

3

)

3

,-

@

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/159



2



Dimension drawings

















3RG40 23–.KB00, 3RG40 23–.KA00


Con-nector type















3RG40 22–0..00 3RG40 22–0..01

3RG40 22–3..00 3RG40 22–3..01

)

3

)

3

,-

@

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/160



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG40 63–0A.30, 3RG40 63–0G.30

3RG40 23–0A.30, 3RG40 23–0G.30

3RG40 23–0AG31, 3RG40 23–0GB31


Con-nector type









3RG40 63–0..30 3RG40 23–0..30 3RG40 23–0..31

)

3

)

3 18

NS

D00

459

54

LED

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/161



2



Dimension drawings














protection• •



Type 3RG40 23–0AB30 3RG40 23–0KB30


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.






3RG40 23–0AB30 3RG40 23–0KB30

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/162



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distanceNo. of connecting wires 3-wireForm M 18












protection•



Type 3RG41 13–.AG01, 3RG41 13–.AG33


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.




NO contact, pnp 11 – 3RG41 13–0AG01

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG41 13–3AG33 3RG41 13–3AG01



3RG41 13–0..33 3RG41 13–3..33 3RG41 13–0..01 3RG41 13–3..01

)

3

)

3

M 18x1

50

NS

D01

067

LED

70 SW

24

4

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/163



2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG46 22–.AN.., 3RG46 22–.GN..


Con-nector type

Order No.














3RG46 22–0.N.. 3RG46 22–3.N..

)

3

)

3

NS

D00

489

54

M 12x1

40

10

LED

SW

17

4

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/164



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings















Type 3RG40 14–.A.33, 3RG40 14–.G.33

3RG40 14–.A.01, 3RG40 14–.G.00

3RG40 14–.CD00


Con-nector type






NC contact, npn 14 3RG40 14–0GA33 – –


10 – – 3RG40 14–0CD00






1 F – – 3RG40 14–3CD00


3RG40 14–...33


3RG40 14–0..33 3RG40 14–3..33 3RG40 14–0..00 3RG40 14–0..01

3RG40 14–3..00 3RG40 14–3..01

)

3

)

3

,-

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/165



2



Dimension drawings

Class Normal (Mercedes-Benz) Standard Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire 2-wireForm M 30 Ø 20 mm Ø 20 mm

Embeddable in metal Shielded Unshielded Unshielded


Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Molded plastic Molded plasticOperational voltage• DC V 10 ... 30 10 ... 36 20 ... 250• AC V – – 20 ... 250

No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA 15 ≤ 5 ≤ 0.8• At 230 V AC mA – – ≤ 2.5

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 300 250 250/100• 20 ms mA – – 2200

Minimum load current mA – – 5




Switching status display – Yellow LED Yellow LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • –• Reverse polarity protection • • –• Wire-break protection • – –• Inductive interference




Type 3RG40 14–3CD01 3RG46 25–6AG00 3RG46 25–6KD00


Con-nector type


With M 12 connectorNO and NC contacts, pnp

1 F 3RG40 14–3CD01 – –

With terminal compartment 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2

NO contact, pnp 26 – 3RG46 25–6AG00 –

NO or NC contact programmable

24 – – 3RG46 25–6KD00


Dimension depending on type


3RG40 14–3CD01 3RG46 25–6..00

)

3

)

3

)

3

)

3

NS

D0_

0052

8

M 30 × 1,5

7080

50S

W 3

65

M 12 × 1

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/166



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤1.5 ≤ 10 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1.5












3RG40 14–.KB00, 3RG40 14–.KA00


Con-nector type














3RG40 14–...33


3RG40 14–0..00 3RG40 14–0..01

3RG40 14–3..00 3RG40 14–3..01

)

3

)

3

,-

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/167



2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG40 54–0A.30, 3RG40 54–0G.30

3RG40 14–0A.30, 3RG40 14–0G.30

3RG40 14–0AG31, 3RG40 14–0GB31


Con-nector type









3RG40 54–0..30 3RG40 14–0..30 3RG40 14–0..31

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/168



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG46 14–.AN.., 3RG46 14–.GN..


Con-nector type

Order No.


Messing, verchromtNO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 14–0AN01




With M 12 connectorMessing, verchromtNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 14–3AN01








3RG46 14–0.N.. 3RG46 14–3.N..

3

)

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/169


Operating distance 10 mmOperating distance 12 mm

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distanceNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm M 12 M 18

Embeddable in metal Unshielded Semi-shielded




No-load supply current I0 mA 10 ≤ 10






Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • •• Reverse polarity protection • •• Wire-break protection – •• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG46 22–0AG02, 3RG46 22–3AB03

3RG41 12–.A.01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 22–0AG02 3RG46 13–1AB01

NO contact, npn 13 – 3RG46 13–0GB00

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 22–3AB03 3RG46 13–3AB01

NO contact, npn 4 E, F – 3RG46 13–3GB01


3RG46 22

3RG46 22–0AG02 3RG46 22–3AB03 3RG46 13–...0. 3RG46 13–3..01

3RG46 13


)

3

)

3

#

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/170



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG46 23–.AN.., 3RG46 23–.GN..


Con-nector type

Order No.


Messing, verchromtNO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 23–0AN01




With M 12 connectorMessing, verchromtNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 23–3AN01








3RG46 23–0.N.. 3RG46 23–3.N..

)

3

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/171



2



Dimension drawings















Type 3RG40 24–.A.33, 3RG40 24–.G.33

3RG40 24–.A.01, 3RG40 24–.G.00

3RG40 24–.CD00


Con-nector type








10 – – 3RG40 24–0CD00






1 F – – 3RG40 24–3CD00



3RG40 24–0..33 3RG40 24–3..33 3RG40 24–0..00 3RG40 24–0..01

3RG40 24–3..00 3RG40 24–3..01

)

3

)

3

A @

,-

@

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/172



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Normal (Mercedes-Benz) StandardNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 4-wire 4-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm










Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply Green LED Green LED Green LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • – •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection • • •• Inductive interference




Type 3RG40 31–6A.01, 3RG40 31–6GB00

3RG40 31–6CD00, 3RG40 34–6CD00

3RG40 38–3CD00, 3RG40 38–3GD00


Con-nector type


With M12 connector, rotatableNO and NC contacts, pnp

1 F – – 3RG40 38–3CD00

NO and NC contacts, npn

– F – – 3RG40 38–3GD00

With terminal compartmentNO contact, pnp 19 3RG40 31–6AG01 – –

NC contact, pnp 20 3RG40 31–6AF01 – –



18 – 3RG40 31–6CD00 –

Version for Mercedes-BenzNO and NC contacts, pnp

18 – 3RG40 34–6CD00 –



3RG40 31–6..0.

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions.

3RG40 34–6..00

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor.

3RG40 38–3..00

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.

3

)

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/173



2



Dimension drawings




Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated Brass, nickel-plated


No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 1.5 ≤ 10 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1.5












3RG40 24–.KB00, 3RG40 24–.KA00


Con-nector type















3RG40 24–0..00 3RG40 24–0..01

3RG40 24–3..00 3RG40 24–3..01

)

3

)

3

A @

,-

@

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/174



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 2-wire 3-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 1.5 ≤ 20 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1.5

Rated operational current• Continuous mA 25 300 300• 20 ms mA – – 1800


Switching frequency Hz 100 100 25/150 (AC/DC)

Repeat accuracy mm 0.75 0.75 0.75

Power-up delay ms 100 100 100

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply – Green LED –





Type 3RG40 31–6JB00 3RG40 31–6AD00 3RG40 31–6KD00


Con-nector type


With terminal compartment 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2


NO or NC contact selectable, pnp

23 – 3RG40 31–6AD00 –

NO or NC contact selectable

24 – – 3RG40 31–6KD00



3RG40 31–6JB00, 3RG40 31–6KD00


3RG40 31–6AD00


3

)

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/175



2



Dimension drawings

Class Extra duty (AC/DC) Greater rated operating distanceNo. of connecting wires 2-wire 3-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm M 30



Enclosure material Molded plastic Brass, nickel-plated

Operational voltage• DC V 20 ... 320 15 ... 34• AC V 20 ... 265 –

No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA 1.5 ≤ 17 (24 V); ≤ 30 (34 V)• At 230 V AC mA ≤ 2.0 –

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 300 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)• 20 ms mA –

Minimum load current mA ≤ 2 –

Switching frequency f Hz 25/50 (AC/DC) 300


Differential travel H mm 0.04 ... 3.3 –



Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof – •• Reverse polarity protection – •• Wire-break protection – •• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG40 38–3KB00 3RG41 14–.AG01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 – 3RG41 14–0AG01


With M 12 connector, rotatableNO contact 8 E, F 3RG40 38–3KB00 –



3RG40 38–3..00

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector.

3RG41 14–0AG01 3RG41 14–3AG01

3

)

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/176



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG40 64–0A.30, 3RG40 64–0G.30

3RG40 24–0A.30, 3RG40 24–0G.30

3RG40 24–0AG31, 3RG40 24–0GB31


Con-nector type









3RG40 64–0..30 3RG40 24–0..30 3RG40 24–0..31

)

3

)

3

A @

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/177



2



Dimension drawings














protection• •



Type 3RG40 24–0AB30 3RG40 24–0KB30


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.






3RG40 24–0AB30 3RG40 24–0KB30

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/178



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Degree of protection IP68 / 69 K IP68 / 69 K (DC 65 V) IP68 / 69 K (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 25 (24 V); ≤ 40 (34 V) ≤ 20 ≤ 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – ≤ 1.5

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 300 300• 20 ms mA – – 1800






Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • –• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection • • •• Inductive interference




Type 3RG40 30–0CD0. 3RG40 30–0AB0., 3RG40 30–0AA0.

3RG40 30–0KB0., 3RG40 30–0KA0.


Con-nector type



Sensor in longitudinal axisNO contact, pnp 11 – 3RG40 30–0AB00 –

NC contacts, pnp 12 – 3RG40 30–0AA00 –


10 3RG40 30–0CD00 – –



Sensor 90° to longitudinal axisNO contact, pnp 11 – 3RG40 30–0AB01 –

NC contacts, pnp 12 – –


10 3RG40 30–0CD01 – –





3RG40 30–0..0.

3

)

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/179



2



Dimension drawings

Class U BERO (without reduction factor)No. of connecting wires 3-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm










Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Power supply Green LED





Type 3RG46 34–6.N01, 3RG46 38–3.N01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.

With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 38–3AN01 –

NO contacts, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 38–3GN01 –

With terminal compartment 0.5 ... 2.5 mm2

NO contact, pnp 28 – 3RG46 34–6AN01

NO contacts, npn 29 – 3RG46 34–6GN01


3RG46 38

3RG46 38–3.N01 3RG46 34–6.N01


3RG46 34


NSD0_00565

20 80 B

A 45

A

B

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/180



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 2-wireForm Ø 34 mm Ø 34 mm



Enclosure material Molded plastic Molded plasticOperational voltage• DC V 10 ... 36 20 ... 250• AC V – 20 ... 250

No-load supply current I0• At DC 24 V mA 5 0.8• At AC 230 V mA – 2.5

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 200 250/100• 20 ms mA – 2200






Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • –• Reverse polarity protection • –• Wire-break protection – –• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG46 26–6AD00 3RG46 26–6KD00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO or NC selectable, pnp

26 3RG46 26–6AD00 –


24 – 3RG46 26–6KD00



3RG46 26–6..00

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/181



2



Dimension drawings











Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply Green LED Green LED


protection• •



Type 3RG40 41–6A.01, 3RG40 41–6GB00

3RG40 41–6CD00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.

With terminal compartmentNO contact, pnp 19 3RG40 41–6AG01 –




18 – 3RG40 41–6CD00



3RG40 41–6..0.


)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/182



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Normal (PLC) Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 2-wire 3-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm











Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply – Green LED –





Type 3RG40 41–6JB00 3RG40 41–6AD00 3RG40 41–6KD00


Con-nector type





23 – 3RG40 41–6AD00 –


24 – – 3RG40 41–6KD00



3RG40 41–6JB00, 3RG40 41–6KD00


3RG40 41–6AD00


Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/183



2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distanceNo. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wire 4-wireForm M 18 Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm

Embeddable in metal Unshielded Shielded Shielded


Enclosure material Brass, nickel-plated Molded plastic Molded plastic


No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 10 9.5 ≤ 30 (24 V); ≤ 50 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 200 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)


Repeat accuracy R mm 1.0 ≤ 2 % 1.5

Power-up delay tv ms 100 ≤ 8 100

Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply – Green LED Green LED

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • • •• Reverse polarity protection • • •• Wire-break protection • • •• Inductive interference protection • • •• Radio interference protection • • •


Type 3RG46 23–.AB02, 3RG46 23–.GB02

3RG46 38–3AG01, 3RG46 38–3GB01

3RG41 34–6CD01

Switching output Circ. diag. No.

Connec-tor type



NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 23–0AB02 – –

NO contact, npn 13 3RG46 23–0GB02 – –

With M12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 23–3AB02 B 3RG46 38–3AG01 –

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 23–3GB02 B 3RG46 38–3GB01 –



18 – – 3RG41 34–6CD01


3RG46 23

3RG46 23–0..02 3RG46 23–3..02 3RG46 38–3..01 3RG41 34–6CD01

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor

3RG46 38, 3RG41 34


)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/184



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 4-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 30 (24 V); ≤ 40 (34 V) 1.5• At Umax mA – ≤ 2.0

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 200• 20 ms mA – –

Minimum load current mA – < 2



Differential travel H mm 0,05 ... 3,3 0,05 ... 3,3


Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply Green LED –

Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • –• Reverse polarity protection • –• Wire-break protection • –• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG41 38–3CD00, 3RG41 38–3GD00

3RG41 38–3KB00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.

With M12 connectorNO and NC contacts, pnp

1 F 3RG41 38–3CD00 –


– F 3RG41 38–3GD00 –

NO contact 8 F – 3RG41 38–3KB00



3RG41 38–3..00

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector

3

)

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/185



2



Dimension drawings












Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof •• Reverse polarity protection •• Wire-break protection •• Inductive interference protec-

tionMagnetic field resistant up to 160 mT r.m.s.



Type 3RG46 24–.AN.., 3RG46 24–.GN..


Con-nector type

Order No.














3RG46 24–0.N.. 3RG46 24–3.N..

)

3

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/186



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings











Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Power supply –


protection•



Type 3RG46 14–.AB00, 3RG46 14–.GB00


Con-nector type

Order No.


NO contact, pnp 11 3RG46 14–0AB00


With M 12 connectorNO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG46 14–3AB00

NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 14–3GB00



3RG46 14–0..00 3RG46 14–3..00

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/187



2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Greater rated operating distance (DC 65 V)No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wireForm Cubic 60 mm × 80 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm

Embeddable in metal Shielded Semi-shielded




No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 30 (24 V); ≤ 50 (34 V) 20

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 300






protection• •



Type 3RG40 32–6CD00 3RG41 31–6AD0.


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.



23 – 3RG41 31–6AD00


18 3RG40 32–6CD00 –

Version for Opel (increased EMC)NO or NC contact selectable, pnp

23 – 3RG41 31–6AD04


3RG40 32

3RG40 32–6CD00 3RG41 31–6AD0.


3RG41 31


)

3

)

3

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/188



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG46 44–6.N01, 3RG46 48–3.N02


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 48–3GN01 –



NO contact, npn 29 – 3RG46 44–6GN02



3RG46 48–3.N01 3RG46 44–6.N02


)

3

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/189



2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 60 mm × 80 mm Cubic 60 mm × 80 mm Cubic 60 mm × 80 mm





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 30 (24 V); ≤ 50 (34 V) ≤ 40 1,0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1,5






Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply Green LED Green LED –





Type 3RG40 42–6CD00 3RG40 42–6AD00 3RG40 42–6KD00


Con-nector type




18 3RG40 42–6CD00 – –


23 – 3RG40 42–6AD00 –


24 – – 3RG40 42–6KD00



3RG40 42–6CD00, 3RG40 42–6AD00

3RG40 42–6KD00

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/190



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance (Mercedes-Benz)No. of connecting wires 4-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm





No-load supply current I0 mA ≤ 30 (24 V); ≤ 50 (34 V)

Rated operating current Ie mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C)






protection•



Type 3RG41 44–6CD01


Con-nector type

Order No.



18 3RG41 44–6CD01



3RG41 44–6CD01

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With screwed sensor

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/191



2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance Greater rated operating distance (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 4-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 30 (24 V); ≤ 40 (34 V) 1.5• At Umax mA – ≤ 2.0

Rated operating current Ie• Continuous mA 200 (≤ 50 °C); 150 (≤ 85 °C) 300• 20 ms mA –

Minimum load current mA – < 2



Differential travel H mm 0.05 ... 7.7 0.05 ... 7.7



Protective measures• Spurious signal suppression • •• Short-circuit-proof/overload-proof • –• Reverse polarity protection • –• Wire-break protection • –• Inductive interference

protection• •



Type 3RG41 48–3CD00, 3RG41 48–3GD00

3RG41 48–3KB00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.

With M12 connectorNO and NC contacts, pnp

1 F 3RG41 48–3CD00 –


– F 3RG41 48–3GD00 –

NO contact 8 F – 3RG41 48–3KB00



3RG41 48–3..00

The active surface can be adjusted in 5 directions. With rotatable connector

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/192



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class U BERO (without reduction factor) U BERO (without reduction factor)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm









Power-up delay tv ms ≤ 8 ≤ 8



protectionMagnetic field resistant up to 140 mT r.m.s. Magnetic field resistant up to 140 mT r.m.s.

• Radio interference protection • •• Protective insulation • •


Type 3RG46 48–3.N11 3RG46 34–6.N01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.


NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 48–3GN11 –



NO contact, npn 29 – 3RG46 44–6GN01


3RG46 48–3.N11

3RG46 48–3.N11 3RG46 34–6.N01


3RG46 34–6.N01


)

3

)

3

#

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/193



2



Dimension drawings

Class Standard Extra duty (65 V DC) Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 4-wire 3-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 80 mm × 100 mm Cubic 80 mm × 100 mm Cubic 80 mm × 100 mm





No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 30 (24 V); ≤ 50 (34 V) ≤ 40 1.0• At 230 V AC mA – – 1.5






Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED• Power supply Green LED Green LED –





Type 3RG40 43–6CD00 3RG40 43–6AD00 3RG40 43–6KD00


Con-nector type




18 3RG40 43–6CD00 – –


23 – 3RG40 43–6AD00 –


24 – – 3RG40 43–6KD00



3RG40 43–6CD00, 3RG40 43–6AD00

3RG40 43–6KD00

)

3

)

3

#

*

C

#

*

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/194



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Extra duty (65 V DC/ Ford) Extra duty (AC/DC)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 2-wireForm Cubic 80 mm × 100 mm Cubic 80 mm × 100 mm

Embeddable in metal Unshielded/shielded Unshielded/shielded

Rated operating distance sn 30 mm / 40 mm 30 mm / 40 mm



No-load supply current I0• At 24 V DC mA ≤ 40 1.0• At Umax mA – 1.5




Repeat accuracy R mm 2 2




protection• •



Type 3RG40 33–6AD01 3RG40 33–6KD01


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.



23 3RG40 33–6AD01 –


24 – 3RG40 33–6KD01



3RG40 33–6AD01 3RG40 33–6KD01



)

3

)

3

#

*

C

#

*

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/195



2



Dimension drawings











Displays• Switching status Yellow LED• Power supply –


protection•



Type 3RG46 24–.AB02, 3RG46 24–.GB02


Con-nector type

Order No.





NO contact, npn 4 E, F 3RG46 24–3GB02



3RG46 24–0..02 3RG46 24–3..02

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/196



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC)No. of connecting wires 3-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm












protection•



Type 3RG41 41–6AB03, 3RG41 41–6AD0.


Con-nector type

Order No.




23 3RG41 41–6AD00

Version for Opel (increased EMC)NO or NC contact selectable, pnp

23 3RG41 41–6AD04



3RG41 41–6A.0.


Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/197



2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC)No. of connecting wires 3-wireForm Cubic 40 mm × 40 mm


Rated operating distance sn 25 mm or 40 mm, selectable










protection•



Type 3RG41 41–3AB0.


Con-nector type

Order No.


Connector can be offset in steps of 30°NO contact, pnp 2 E, F 3RG41 41–3AB01





3RG41 41–3AB02


3RG41 41–3AB01


)

3

)

3

)

3

)

3

#

C

*

#

C

*

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/198



Inductive BEROs

2



Dimension drawings

Class Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC) Greater rated operating distance (65 V DC)No. of connecting wires 3-wire 3-wireForm Cubic 60 mm × 80 mm Cubic 80 mm × 100 mm





No-load supply current I0 mA 20 20



Repeat accuracy R mm 1.5 2




protection• •



Type 3RG41 42–6AD00 3RG41 43–6AD00


Con-nector type

Order No. Order No.



23 3RG41 42–6AD00 3RG41 43–6AD00


3RG41 42

3RG41 42–6AD00 3RG41 43–6AD00

3RG41 43


)

3

)

3

#

*

C

)

3

)

3

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/199



2



Dimension drawings
















Type 3RG46 43–6AN01, 3RG46 43–6GN01


Con-nector type

Order No.






3RG46 43–6.N01

)

3

)

3

#

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/200


Introduction

Capacitive BEROs

2

Application

BERO 3RG16 capacitive proximity switches are position switches that operate without contact. They detect electrically conductive or non-conductive materials that are in a solid, pow-der or liquid state, e.g. glass, ceramics, plastic, wood, oil, water, cardboard and paper. The BERO switches when the material is at a specific distance from the sensor.

Standard applications for BERO capacitive proximity switches are7 Level control in plastic or glass containers7 Level monitoring in transparent packaging7 Winding wire breakage signaling7 Tape breakage signaling7 Bottle counting7 Tape loop control and tape tension control7 Item counting of any kind.

Examples

Recognition of milk in cartons

Level control for bulk material in vessel

Standards

The same standards are applicable as for the inductive BEROs.

Design

The BEROs are available in DC or AC versions.

7 The DC versions can activate electronic controllers (SIMATIC) or relays directly.

7 With the AC version, the load (contactor relay, solenoid valve) is connected directly to the AC supply network (preferably 230 V, 50 Hz) in series with the BERO.

Functions

The sensing face of a capacitive sensor is formed by two con-centrically arranged metal electrodes that are equivalent to the electrodes of an unwound capacitor. The electrode surfaces A and B are connected into the feedback branch of a high-fre-quency oscillator that is tuned such that it does not oscillate when the surface is free.

When an object approaches the active face of the sensor, it en-ters the electric field in front of the electrode surfaces and causes a change in the coupling capacitance. The oscillator starts to oscillate; the amplitude is recorded by an evaluation cir-cuit and converted into a switching command.

Switching frequency

The build-up characteristics specific to other pulse/interval con-ditions may result in higher switching frequencies than those specified.

Operating distance

The stated values are applicable to a target of metal which is grounded and whose area corresponds to the sensing face of the BERO. The real operating distance sr for non-conductive tar-gets is dependent on the relative dielectric constant εr and the characteristic value (see characteristic curve below).

A+

B-

NSD00721

NSD00722

1 20 40 60 80 %100

20

40

60

80

r

sr

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/201

BERO Proximity SwitchesCapacitive BEROs

Introduction

2

Dielectric constants of various materials

Built-in protection

The protective circuits built into the DC versions make them easy to handle and protect the devices from damage.• Spurious signal suppression• Short-circuit and overload protection• Polarity reversal protection for connections• Inductive interference protection


Circuit diagrams

Material εr Material εrAlcoholAralditeBakeliteGlassMicaVulcanized rubberHard paperWoodCable insulating com-poundAir, vacuumMarbleOiled paperPaperParaffinPetroleumPlexiglasPolyamide

25.83.63.65644.52 ... 72.51842.32.22.23.25

PolyethylenePolypropylenePolystyrenePolyvinylchloridePorcelainPressboardQuartz glassQuartz sandSilicone rubberTeflonTurpentine oilTransformer oilVacuum. airWaterSoft rubberCelluloid

2.32.332.94.443.74.52.822.22.21

802.53

Type DC AC

Operational voltage 10 ... 65 (30) V 20 ... 250 V

• Residual ripple Max. 10 % –

No-load supply current I0 6 ... 12 mA Max. 1.7 mA

Switching frequency f 100 Hz 20 Hz

Repeat accuracy R Max. 2 %

Differential travel H 0.02 ... 0.2 0.02 to 0.2 sr

Outputs:

Rated operating current Ie

• For DC 200 mA –• For 230 V AC (contactor up to size S3) –

- Continuous 500 mA- Up to 20 ms 5 A

Smallest operating current Im –

• Mainly inductive load 10 mA

• Mainly resistive load 5 mA

Residual current Ir 6 ... 12 mA Max. 1.7 mA

Voltage drop Max. 1.8 V Max. 7 V

Lead length, max. permissible 300 m


Ambient temperature

• Operation –20 ... +70 °C

• Storage –40 ... +85 °C

Shock resistance 30 × g, 11 ms duration

Resistance to vibration 10 ... 55 Hz, 1 mm amplitude

DC ACFig. 1 Fig. 3 Fig. 5

BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves

BERO operated Load E1 connected (NO function) Load E2 disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves

BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) Load E disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves

NO or NC function according to typeFig. 2 Fig. 4 Fig. 6

BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves

BERO operated Load E1 connected (NO function) Load E2 disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves

BERO operated Load E connected (NO function) Load E disconnected (NC function) e.g. auxiliary contactors, solenoid valves

NO or NC function, programmable

NS

D00

723

BN

BK

BU

L

L

EK

NS

D00

726

BN

BK

BU L

WH E2

LE1K

NS

D00

725

BN

BU

GNYE

L

PE/SL

NEK

NS

D00

727

1

4

3

L

L

EK

NS

D00

724

1

4

3 L

2 E2

LE1K 1/3

2/4

L1

N(L2)

NS

D00

728

EK

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/202


10 to 65 V DC

Capacitive BEROs

2


1) For target made of earthed metal.2) With an alignment sr > sn, the differential travel can increase signifi-

cantly.


Dimension drawings

Characteristics

No. of connecting wires 3 3 4Form M18 Cubic 20 mm × 32 mm M30


Rated operating distance sn1) 5 mm 5 mm 10 mm

Real operating distance sr2) Adjustable Fixed comparison Adjustable

Enclosure material Molded plastic Metal Metal with molded-plastic head



Displays• Switching status Red LED Yellow LED Red LED• Operational voltage – Green LED –


Type 3RG16 13–0AB00 3RG16 73–.AG00 3RG16 14–0AC00


Con-nector type


With 2 m cable, LiYY 3 × 0.5 mm2 3 × 0.25 mm2 4 × 0.34 mm2

NO contact, pnp 1 3RG16 13–0AB00 3RG16 73–0AG00 –

NO and NC contacts, pnp (compatible)

3 – – 3RG16 14–0AC00

With connector, Ø 8 mmNO contact, pnp 2 A, C – 3RG16 73–7AG00 –

3RG16 13–0AB00 3RG16 73–0AG00

3RG16 73–7AG00

3RG16 14–0AC00

Standard target: Metal, 20 mm × 20 mm × 1 mm, with direct connection to ground



20

NS

D00

741

LED 3

13

ø3,4

32

8

4,3

20

NS

D00

742

LED 3

13ø3,4

32

8

4,3

8

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/203

BERO Proximity SwitchesCapacitive BEROs

10 to 65 V DC

2



cantly.


Dimension drawings

Characteristics

No. of connecting wires 4 4 4Form M30 Ø 40 mm Cubic 40mm × 40mm



Real operating distance sr2) Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable




Displays• Switching status Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED• Operational voltage Green LED Green LED Green LED


Type 3RG16 14–6AC00 3RG16 55–6AC00 3RG16 30–6AC00


Con-nector type


With terminal compartment Up to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2.5 mm2

NO and NC contacts, pnp (compatible)

4 3RG16 14–6AC00 3RG16 55–6AC00 3RG16 30–6AC00

3RG16 14–6AC00 3RG16 55–6AC00

Mounting clamp with Ø 40 mm included in scope of supply

3RG16 30–6AC00




NS

D00

730

M 30x1,5

115

61S

W 3

6

LED

Pg 9

NS

D00

731

9055

ø40

LED

Pg 9

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/204


20 to 250 V AC

Capacitive BEROs

2



cantly.


Dimension drawings

Characteristics

No. of connecting wires 2 + PE 2 2 2Form M30 Ø 40 mm Cubic 40mm × 40mm



Real operating distance sr2) Adjustable Adjustable Adjustable

Enclosure material Metal with molded-plastic head

Molded plastic Molded plastic Molded plastic



Displays• Switching status Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED• Operational voltage – Green LED Green LED Green LED


Type 3RG16 14–0LB00, 3RG16 14–0LA00

3RG16 14–6LD00 3RG16 55–6LD00 3RG16 30–6LD00


Con-nector type


With 2 m cable, LiYY 3 × 0.5 mm2

NO contact 5 3RG16 14–0LB00 – –

NC contact 5 3RG16 14–0LA00 – –

With terminal compartment Up to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2.5 mm2 Up to 2.5 mm2


6 3RG16 14–6LD00 3RG16 55–6LD00 3RG16 30–6LD00

3RG16 14–0LB00, 3RG16 14–0LA00

3RG16 14–6LD00 3RG16 55–6LD00

Mounting clamp with Ø 40 mm included in scope of supply

3RG16 30–6LD00




NS

D00

730

M 30x1,5

115

61S

W 3

6

LED

Pg 9

NS

D00

731

9055

ø40

LED

Pg 9

7

/

7

/

7

/

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/205

BERO Proximity SwitchesAccessories

Power supply units

2

Overview

4AV21 02, 4AV23 02 unstabilized DC power supplies

The power supply units are suitable for connection to public and industrial supply networks in accordance with EN 61000-3-2, -3-3.

The devices are suitable for installation in enclosed controls and electronics cabinets.

Design:• Output voltage 24 V DC according to EN 61131-2 for an input

voltage of +6 to –10 % and a load of 0 to 100 %• Safety transformer to EN 60 742,• Varistor protection circuit• LED status indication• Emitted interference to EN 50081-1• Interference immunity to EN 50082-2.

4FD51 83 load/system power supply

This power supply functions according to the principle of a pri-mary switched-mode regulator and supplies a controlled DC voltage of 24 V of high stability and with low residual ripple.

Design:• Overload and short-circuit proof output, automatic switching

off and on again• Bridging of supply interruptions > 20 ms• LED status indication• Emitted interference to EN 50081-1• Interference immunity to EN 50082-2.

Area of application

The power supplies are suitable for supplying inductive and ca-pacitive BERO proximity switches as well as the DC versions of Sonar BERO ultrasonic proximity switches and Opto BERO pho-toelectric proximity switches.


Type 4AV21 02 4AV23 02 4FD51 83–0AA00–1A

4AV21, 4AV23

4FD51 83

Input

Rated voltage (AC) V – 230/115 switchable• Terminals 1-4, jumper 2-3 V 230 –• Terminals 1-4, jumpers 1-3, 2-4 V 115 –

Voltage tolerance % +6 ... –10 +10 ... –10

Frequency Hz 50 ... 60 50 ... 60

Short-circuit protection External G fuse link built in• Fuse gL/gG (for 230/115 V) A 1/2 2/4 –• Circuit-breaker (for 230/115 V) A 0.4/0.9 0.7/2 –

Output

Rated output voltage DC V 24 24

Ripple % ≤ 3 ≤ 1

Control accuracy % – < 1

Rated output current A 1 3.5 3

Short-circuit protection Electronic, with auto. restart Electronic, with auto. restart

Status indication LEDs Green LED for output voltage

Conductor cross-sections• Screw terminal, solid wire mm² 0,5 ... 6 –• Screw terminal, stranded wire mm² 0,5 ... 4 –• Flat connector (DIN 46244) mm² A 6.3–0.8 –• Cage Clamp, solid, stranded wire mm² – 0.8 ... 2.5

Securing Snap onto 35 mm mounting rail Snap onto 35 mm mounting rail


Ambient temperature °C 0 ... +60 0 ... +55

Type 6EV2 300–4AK00

Input

Rated voltage (AC)• Terminals A1–A2 230 V

Voltage tolerance +10 ... –15 %

Power consumption 34 VA

Frequency 50 ... 60 Hz

Conductor cross-sections 2 × 1.5 mm² (screw terminals)

Output

Output voltage (DC), connections L+ (P)/L– (M)

24 V, stabilized

Ripple ≤ 10 %

Rated output current 1000 mA

Short-circuit protection Built-in


Ambient temperature 0 ... +70 °C

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/206


Power supply units

Accessories

2


For further SIDAC-S power supplies, see Catalog LV 10, Section 13.

Dimension drawings

Circuit diagrams

Version Input voltage Output voltage Output current Order No.AC V DC V A

6EV2 300

SIDAC-S unstabilized DC power supply

115/230 24 1 4AV21 02–2EB00–0A

3.5 4AV23 02–2EB00–0A

SIDAC-S stabilized DC power supply

115/230 24 3 4FD51 83–0AA00–1A

Power supply unit 230 24 1 6EV2 300–4AK00

4AV21 02, 4AV23 02for any arrangement, snap-mounting on DIN rail to EN 50 022 – 35 × 7.5

4AV21: dimension B = 454AV23: dimension B = 72

4FD51 83for any arrangement, snap-mounting on DIN rail to EN 50 022 – 35 × 7.5

6EV2 300–4AK00 Mounting dimensions

4AV21 02, 4AV23 02 4FD51 83

6EV2 300–4AK00

D

3

)E )E

,-

,-/

D

D

$

$

D

/

E" (%" (

%"; 7 ! 7

5)E

)E)

)

,-

,-/

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/207


Connectors

2


1) For terminal assignment, see page 2/211.

Fig. Type 1) Cable Length Color Order No.

m

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

8 mm cable plugs for snap-on mounting, degree of protection IP65

3-pole, 3 × 0.25 mm2

1 A PUR 5 black 3RX1 518

3-pole, 3 × 0.34 mm2


4-pole, 4 × 0.25 mm2

1 B PUR 5 black 3RX1 522

2 3RX1 524

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

8 mm angular cable plugs for snap-on mounting, degree of protection IP65

3-pole, 3 × 0.25 mm2


4 3RX1 527

4-pole, 4 × 0.25 mm2


4 3RX1 552

3-pole, 3 × 0.25 mm2, with 2 LEDs for pnp BERO (NO)

5 C PUR 5 black/clear 3RX1 531

4 3RX1 517

Fig. 6

Fig. 7

Fig. 8

Fig. 9

M8 cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67

3-pole, 3 × 0.25 mm2


7 3RX1 560

8 A Coupling plug with soldering pins max. 0.25 mm2

black 3RX1 583

9 A Coupling plug for HARAX connection black 3RX1 683

4-pole, 4 × 0.25 mm2


7 3RX1 561

8 B Coupling plug with soldering pins max. 0.25 mm2

black 3RX1 581

9 B Coupling plug for HARAX connection black 3RX1 685

Fig. 10

Fig. 11

Fig. 12

M8 angled cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67

3-pole, 3 × 0.25 mm2


11 3RX1 562

12 A Coupling plug with soldering pins max. 0.25 mm2

black 3RX1 582

3-pole, 3 × 0.25 mm2 , with LEDs

10 C PUR 5 (pnp) black 3RX1 666

11 3RX1 564

11 D 5 (npn) 3RX1 565

4-pole, 4 × 0.25 mm2


11 3RX1 563

12 B Coupling plug with soldering pins max. 0.25 mm2

black 3RX1 580

Cable plugs with special lengths available as options:• Minimum ordering quantity 50 units• Delivery time on request.• Extra charge per m.

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/208


Connectors

Accessories

2



m

Fig. 13

Fig. 14

Fig. 15

Fig. 16

M12 cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67

3-pole, 3 × 0.34 mm2

13 E PUR 5 black 3RX1 533

14 3RX1 535

4-pole, 4 × 0.34 mm2

13 F PUR 5 black 3RX1 536

15 F Coupling plug with terminal compart-ment, preassembly possible

black 3RX1 505

16 F Coupling plug for HARAX connection black 3RX1 687

4-pole, 4 × 0.25 mm2

14 F PUR 5 3RX1 513

5-pole, 5 × 0.34 mm2

13 G PUR 5 black 3RX1 630

14 black 3RX1 570

15 G Coupling plug with terminal compart-ment, preassembly possible

black 3RX1 584

Fig. 17

Fig. 18

Fig. 19

M12 angled cable plugs for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67

3-pole, 3 × 0.34 mm2

17 E PUR 5 black 3RX1 538

18 3RX1 541

3-pole, 3 × 0.34 mm2, with LEDs for pnp BERO, only NO

17 H PUR 5 black 3RX1 546

18 3RX1 548

3-pole, 3 × 0.34 mm2, with LEDs for pnp BERO, NO or NC

17 J PUR 5 black 3RX1 544

18 3RX1 515

4-pole, 4 × 0.34 mm2

17 F PUR 5 black 3RX1 542

19 F Coupling plug with terminal compart-ment, preassembly possible

black 3RX1 502

4-pole, 4 × 0.25 mm2

18 F PUR 5 3RX1 512


17 K PUR 5 black 3RX1 568


18 K PUR 5 black 3RX1 567

5-pole, 5 × 0.34 mm2

17 G PUR 5 black 3RX1 631

18 black 3RX1 571

19 G Coupling plug with terminal compart-ment, preassembly possible

black 3RX1 585


#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/209


Connectors

2



m

Fig. 20

Fig. 21

Fig. 22

M8 coupling plugs, degree of protection IP67

For extension cable (union nut of metal) with HARAX connection method

20 3-pole – black 3RX1 684

20 4-pole – black 3RX1 686

M8 coupling plugs, degree of protection IP67

for extension cable (metal union nut) with terminal compartment, screw-type terminal max. 0.75 mm² cable gland max. 6 mm

21 L 4-pole – black 3RX1 586

21 M 5-pole – black 3RX1 667

22 L 4-pole For HARAX con-nection

3RX1 688

Fig. 23 M12 angled coupling plug, degree of protection IP67

for extension cable (metal union nut) with terminal compartment, screw-type terminal max. 0.75 mm² cable gland max. 6 mm

23 L 4-pole – black 3RX1 587

23 M 5-pole – black 3RX1 668

Fig. 24 M12 cable plug for screw mounting, degree of protection IP67

24 – 4-pole Preassembly possi-ble, QUICKON

3RX1 677

Fig. 25 M12 coupling plug, degree of protection IP67

25 – 4-pole Preassembly possi-ble, QUICKON

3RX1 678

For AS-Interface, degree of protection IP67Fig. 26 M12 cable plugs

4 × 0.34 mm2 (union nut of metal)

26 L PUR 5 black 3RX1 672

Fig. 27 M12 angled cable plug

4 × 0.34 mm2 (union nut of metal)

27 L PUR 5 black 3RX1 674


Siemens FS 10 · 20042/210


Connectors

Accessories

2


Version Type 1) Conductor cross-section/color

Length Order No.

m

Cables with M12 sockets and M12 plugs

Connection to 3RX1 660–.. distribution unit (union nut of metal) PUR cable

Note

Only terminal 4 (NO) will be connected.

E, L 3 × 0.34 mm2 0.6 3RX1 633

1 3RX1 634

1.5 3RX1 635

F, L 4 × 0.34 mm2 0.5 3RX1 641

black 1 3RX1 640

1.5 3RX1 642

Cable with M8 socket and M12 plug

Connection to 3RX1 660–.. distribution unit (metal union nut) PUR cable

Note

Only terminal 4 (NO) will be connected.

A, L 3 × 0.25 mm2 0.6 3RX1 636

1 3RX1 637

1.5 3RX1 638

A, L 3 × 0.25 mm2 0.5 3RX1 647

black 1 3RX1 646

1.5 3RX1 648

B, L 4 × 0.25 mm2 0.6 3RX1 644

black 1 3RX1 643

1.5 3RX1 645

Cable with M8 socket and M8 plug A 3 × 0.25 mm2 1 3RX1 690

2 3RX1 691

Cable with M8 angled socket and M8 plug

A 3 × 0.25 mm2 1 3RX1 692

2 3RX1 693

Cables, 20 m, black

According to the number of conductors, the cables can be used for all inductive BEROs, Sonar BEROs and Opto BEROs.

• PUR 3 × 0.34 mm2 3RX1 554

4 × 0.34 mm2 3RX1 555

• PVC, shielded 4 × 0.34 mm2 3RX1 556

T-distributor, M12 plug connection

For connection of thru-beam sensors to AS-Interface modules

3RX1 682

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/211


Connectors

2

Circuit diagrams

Plug connections

Types A, E

BERO with NO

Types B, F, L, N, P

BERO with NC/NO

Types B, F, L, N, P

Sonar BERO compact range M18

Types C, H

BERO with NO, pnp

Type D

BERO with NO, npn

Type G, M

BERO with NC/NO Sonar BERO compact range II and III

Type J

BERO with NC or NO, pnp

Type K

BERO with NO or NC or NO, pnp

BN = BrownBK = BlackWH = White

BU = BlueGR = Gray

Pin assignments

8 mm connection for cable plugs and right-angle cable plugs (view onto connector pins)

M12 connection for cable plugs and right-angle cable plugs (view onto connector pins)

Type A, C, D Type B Type E, F, H, J, K, L, N Type G, M

3,-

35,-34,2-

3,-

35,-

6,E +%-34,2 ";-

3

6

35

34

,-

,F-

,"@( E-

,"@( 2 "(#:-

334

35

,-,2-

,F-

*C

3

3435

,-

,2-,F-

*C

C+

3

35

6

34

,-

,"@( E-

,-

,"@( 2-

,)"(#:-

A

334

35

,-

,-A

,2 E-

334

356

,-,2-

,-A

,E-

C*

?

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/212


Distributors

Accessories

2



Circuit diagrams

Type 3RX1 660

Operational voltage DC V 24

Max. current per switching output A 2

Connections M12 plug-in connections (socket in distribution unit)

Core identification, PUR cable

Black with white numbers

Displays• Per output Yellow LED• Operational voltage Green LED

Enclosure material Formstoff

Degree of protection IP65, in inserted and locked state

Operating temperature °C –5 ... +70

Version Order No.

Distribution units, quadruple

• 3 m cable 3RX1 660–4D

• 5 m cable 3RX1 660–4E

• 10 m cable 3RX1 660–4F

Distribution units, six-way

• 3 m cable 3RX1 660–6D

• 5 m cable 3RX1 660–6E

• 10 m cable 3RX1 660–6F

Distribution units, eight-way

• 3 m cable 3RX1 660–8D

• 5 m cable 3RX1 660–8E

• 10 m cable 3RX1 660–8F

Dummy plugs for unused connections (pack of 10) 3RX9 802–0AA00

)

!"!")$,/87;! !@!""!-,/87;! !@!""!-,/87;! !@!""!-

/

8!%9!"#:

/,/87;! !@!""!-

/,/87;! !@!""!-

,/87;! !@!""!-,/87;! !@!""!-

,/87;! !@!""!-

,/87;! !@!""!-

%>

%>

%>

%>

%>& ";:(#

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/213


Mounting accessories

2


1) Supplied without fixing screws.

Version Order No.

32SX6 281 to 3SX6 284 Mounting clamp (molded plastic) 1)

For BERO with thread: M8 3SX6 281

M12 3SX6 282

M18 3SX6 283

M30 3SX6 284

3SX9 910 Adapter piecesfrom Pg 13.5 to NPT ½

for BERO with Pg 13.5 thread

3SX9 910

Adapter piecesfrom M 20 × 1.5 to NPT ½

for BERO with M20 thread

3SX9 918

3SB19 02–2AE Molded plastic Pg 13.5 screwed joint 6 mm long, with seal

for BERO with Pg 13.5 thread

3SB19 02–2AE

Molded plastic M20 × 1.5 screwed joint

for BERO with M20 thread

3SB39 01–0CK

3RX1 303 Alignment plate

for square proximity switches 3RG16 30, 3RG40 30, 3RG40 31, 3RG40 34, 3RG40 41, 3RG41 31, 3RG41 41, 3RG46 31

3RX1 303

3RX1 304 Mounting bracketfor snapping onto C-shaped rail,can slide up to 20 mm lengthwise, rotatable through 360°

for square proximity switches 3RG16 30, 3RG40 30, 3RG40 31, 3RG40 34, 3RG40 41, 3RG41 31, 3RG41 41, 3RG46 31

3RX1 304

Metal support for fiber-optic cables and leads

• For Ø 7 mm 3RX7 943

• For Ø 8 mm 3RX7 944

• For Ø 10 mm 3RX7 945

Smaller diameters on request

b

a

NSD01021

e

f

c

d

g

3SX6 281 3SX6 282 3SX6 283 3SX6 284

abcdefG

262211.6

Ø 3.51612.67.9

(for M8)

363018

Ø 4.52418.511.9

(for M12)

453026

Ø 4.53219.618.0

(for M18)

583036

Ø 4.54419.629.8

(for M30)

M 3

A

12168

NS

D00

954

4

B

3,2

6

A

B3,5

204,5

206

207

25

825

1025

Siemens FS 10 · 20042/214


Notes

2

7

Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/215


Notes

2

Documents

BERO 2 Proximity Switchesmaterias.fi.uba.ar/7206/FS10_ch02_BERO_e_2004_10.pdf · Siemens FS 10 · 2004 2/5 BERO Proximity Switches IQ Sense IQ-Sense photoelectric sensors 2 Overview